Yamaha PSR-E413 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Owner’s Manual
DIGITAL KEYBOARD
EN
2 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one
described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-
mended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any
kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use
an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18
AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-
dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify
any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-
phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting
fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-
ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or
installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fix-
tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer
before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-
mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-
tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with
both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the
following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries
of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or
incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-
ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-
lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason
its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,
state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist
you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-
ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-
chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-
nent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
92-BP (bottom)
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 3
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også
selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS:
Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E413
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
(FCC DoC)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-
minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by
Ya maha Music U.K. Ltd.
(2 wires)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batte-
rien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie kön-
nen bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll
abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
4 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or
overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll
anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid
leakage.
Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together
with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with
manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of
batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery
fluid leakage.
Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,
remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the
battery fluid.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with
water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause
loss of sight or chemical burns.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Battery
Location
(4)-12 1/2
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 5
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Saving and backing up your data
The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory
when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the
Registration Memory (page 80.)
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save
important data to an external device such as a computer (pages 92).
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
Trademarks
•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
(4)-12 2/2
6 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard:
Composition Title: Against All Odds
Composer’s Name: Collins 0007403
Copyright Owner’s Name: EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD
All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with
respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all
computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of
such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright
has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.
Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that
some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control
parameters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-
puter is on).
Stereo Sampled Piano
The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling tech-
nology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you
maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter,
which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a
real musical instrument!
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.
Copyright Notice
Logos
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 7
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing
the Yamaha PSR-E413 Digital Keyboard!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.
The PSR-E413 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.
• Owner’s Manual
• Music rest
• Accessory CD-ROM
Included Accessories
Music Rest
Insert the music rest
into the slots as shown.
8 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Special Features of the PSR-E413
Creating New Sounds Page 18
By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion,
“sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drasti-
cally. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, enve-
lope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time!
Arpeggio Function Page 14
Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this func-
tion automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play
the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be pro-
duced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type.
Performance assistant technology Page 23
Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect
performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do
is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the
keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in
time with the music.
Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28
The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be
changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can
change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to
play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.
Play Along with Styles Page 33
Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.
The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-
ering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and
much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-
iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.
102
PopBossa
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 9
Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6
Logos ..................................................................................... 6
Included Accessories ............................................................. 7
Special Features of the PSR-E413 ........................................ 8
Setting Up 10
Power Requirements ........................................................... 10
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11
Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11
Panel Controls and Terminals 12
Front Panel .......................................................................... 12
Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13
Quick Guide
Creating Arpeggios 14
Create Original Sounds 18
Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18
Using the Knobs................................................................... 21
The Easy Way to Play Piano 23
Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23
Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
—SPLIT .......................................................................... 30
Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31
Fun Sounds 32
Drum Kits ............................................................................. 32
Sound Effects....................................................................... 32
Playing Styles 33
Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33
Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38
Using Songs 39
Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40
Types of Songs .................................................................... 42
Select a Song For a Lesson 43
Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43
Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46
Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48
Play Using the Music Database 49
Change a Song’s Style 50
Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50
Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50
Record Your Own Performance 52
Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track
from a User Song............................................................ 55
Backup and Initialization 56
Backup ................................................................................. 56
Initialization .......................................................................... 56
Basic Operation and Displays 57
Basic Operation ................................................................... 57
Display Items ....................................................................... 59
Reference
Adding Effects 60
Harmony...............................................................................60
Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61
Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62
Handy Performance Features 63
The Metronome.................................................................... 63
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,
and the Length of Each Beat ..........................................64
Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................ 64
Tap Start .............................................................................. 65
Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65
Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66
Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66
Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67
One Touch Setting ...............................................................68
Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................69
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound............................. 69
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70
Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................................70
Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................................72
Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm
(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................73
Loading Style Files............................................................... 74
Chord Basics........................................................................ 75
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77
Song Settings 78
Song Volume........................................................................78
A-B Repeat...........................................................................78
Muting Independent Song Parts...........................................79
Change the Melody Voice.................................................... 79
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80
Saving to the Registration Memory...................................... 80
Recalling a Registration Memory .........................................81
Setting the Sleep Mode 82
The Functions 83
Selecting and Setting Functions...........................................83
Connecting to a Computer 86
What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 86
Connecting a Personal Computer........................................ 87
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer.....88
Remote Control of MIDI Devices..........................................89
Initial Send ........................................................................... 90
Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 90
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 93
Important Notices about the CD-ROM .................................93
CD-ROM Contents............................................................... 94
System Requirements.......................................................... 95
Software Installation............................................................. 95
Appendix
Troubleshooting................................................................. 99
Scores ............................................................................... 100
Voice List ......................................................................... 106
Drum Kit List .................................................................... 110
Style List ........................................................................... 112
Arpeggio List.................................................................... 113
Music Database List ........................................................ 114
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 116
Effect Type List ................................................................ 117
MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 118
MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 120
Specifications................................................................... 123
Index.................................................................................. 124
Contents
10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.
Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC
adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete
resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor
Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the
instrument is set to STANDBY.
Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
Open the battery compartment cover located on the
instrument’s bottom panel.
Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow
the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-
ment.
Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V
“AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batter-
ies are recommended.) When battery power becomes
too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all
batteries, following the precautions listed below.
If necessary, also make sure to save all important User
data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are
lost when the batteries are removed.
Power Requirements
Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recom-
mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may
result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the
instrument.
WARNING
Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,
or during electrical storms.
CAUTION
AC power
adaptor
AC outlet
Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from
the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are
installed.
NOTE
Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument.
Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may
exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possi-
bly resulting in a loss of flash memory data.
Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining
the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may
result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.
When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of
six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use
different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the
same time.
If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time,
remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage.
Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash
memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained
rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become
drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and
the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.
CAUTION
Setting Up
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 11
Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.
The PSR-E413 speakers are automatically shut off
when a plug is inserted into this jack.
The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an exter-
nal output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT
jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape
recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the
instrument’s output signal to that device.
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha
FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch
sustain on and off.
Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-
minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance
data and song files between the two (page 87). To use
the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-
lowing:
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-
ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable
to connect the instrument to the computer. After
making the connections, turn on the power of the
instrument.
• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on
page 95.
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-
UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch again to turn the power OFF.
Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instru-
ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is
turned on.
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)
•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-
ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be
damaging to your hearing.
WARNING
•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external
devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to
observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment
damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
CAUTION
Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-
TAIN jack before turning on the power.
Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this
changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
footswitch operation.
NOTE
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)
Turning the Power On
Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument
store, computer store or electrical appliance store.
NOTE
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the bat-
teries from the instrument.
CAUTION
•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message
is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory
and result in data loss.
CAUTION
12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11
w LIVE CONTROL
[ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18
[A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21
e [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 57
r [DEMO/PC] button........................... page 40
t [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT]
button ............................................... page 23
y [EASY SONG ARRANGER]
button ............................................... page 50
u [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 83
i LESSON
[L], [R] buttons................................. page 44
[START] button ................................ page 44
o [METRONOME] button .................... page 63
!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27
!1 SONG MEMORY
[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52
!2 ARPEGGIO
[ON/OFF] button.............................. page 14
[TYPE] button .................................. page 15
!3 SONG CONTROL
[] (REPEAT & LEARN) button ... page 48
[] (A-B REPEAT) button ......... page 78
[] (REW) button .......................... page 40
[] (FF) button .............................. page 40
[] (PAUSE) button.......................... page 40
[] (START/STOP) button....pages 40, 58
!4 STYLE CONTROL
[ACMP ON/OFF] button .................. page 34
[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............ page 71
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button............... page 71
[SYNC STOP] button....................... page 71
[SYNC START] button..................... page 70
[START/STOP] button ..............pages 33, 58
Front Panel
Front Panel
001
001
GrandPno
q
w
e
r
t
y
@5
@6
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!4
!3
Song Category List
(page 41)
Style Category List
(page 112)
Display
(page 59)
Panel Controls and Terminals
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 13
!5 Dial............................................ pages 58, 83
!6 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons ..................................... pages 58, 83
!7 [SONG] button ................................. page 39
!8 [STYLE] button ................................ page 33
!9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49
@0 [VOICE] button................................. page 28
@1 Number buttons [0]–[9],
[+] and [-] buttons.................... pages 58, 83
@2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31
@3 REGIST MEMORY
[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 80
@4 VOICE CONTROL
[SPLIT] button ................................. page 30
[DUAL] button.................................. page 29
[HARMONY] button ......................... page 60
[TOUCH] button ............................... page 65
@5 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66
@6 Drum Kit........................................... page 32
The illustrations next to each key indicate the
drum and percussion instruments assigned to the
keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected.
@7 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 87
@8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11
@9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11
#0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10
f
r
Rear Panel
@4
!7
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
!5
!6
@7 @8
@9 #0
!8
Voice Category List
(page 106)
Rear Panel
Music Database List
(page 114)
14 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Creating Arpeggios
The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by
simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you
could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeg-
gio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-
type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it
is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be
used for music production as well as performance.
1
Press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeg-
gio function on.
The indicator lights when the Arpeggio function is on.
Voices and the Arpeggio Function
This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play
via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 148
the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start
playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automati-
cally be turned off when you select any other voice.
If you want to use voices 129–148 for normal performance without the
arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the
arpeggio function off after selecting the voice.
Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on.
Voice No. Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name
129 Concerto 139 ReggaeOrgan
130 Pizzicato 140 Harpeggio
131 Piano Ballad 141 SalsaPIano
132 Synth Sequence 142 AnalogSequence
133 Guitarist 143 Sawtooth
134 Pauls Bass 144 Piano Arpeggio
135 Trance Bass 145 Guitar Arpeggio
136 SynthChords 146 ClubBeat
137 Acid Bass 147 R&B Loop
138 Funky Clavi 148 ClubAdds
See “Try Playing a Variety of
Instrument Voices” on page 28.
NOTE
Quick Guide
Creating Arpeggios
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 15
2
Select an arpeggio type.
The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you
select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type.
Press the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] button and the name of the current
arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the
desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided
on page 113.
3
Play the keyboard.
The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the num-
ber of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can
save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any
time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also
record your performance (page 52).
The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and
does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the
same time as the harmony function.
4
When you have finished playing with the arpeggio func-
tion, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn it off.
02
DownOct
ARP Type
The currently selected
arpeggio type
Make sure that you are not
pressing any of the keyboard’s
keys while turning the arpeggio
function on or off.
NOTE
Creating Arpeggios
16 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Create a Pop Tune
You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your
right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds.
1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28).
For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND]
button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a
single button press.
2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1
and 2 on the preceding page).
For this example select “02 DownOct”.
That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function.
3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function.
A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern.
Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the
display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “002
8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style.
8BtModrn
002
Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33.
NOTE
Creating Arpeggios
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 17
4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.
When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only
for specifying accompaniment chords.
5 Press the [START/STOP] button.
The rhythm accompaniment will start.
6 Begin playing.
Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the
beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together.
The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord.
Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes.
If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance
assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature
is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes!
Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand
plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the
split point. (page 30)
8BtModrn
002
The ACMP ON icon will
appear.
Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34.
NOTE
CAm FG7sus4
Split point
18 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Create Original Sounds
The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to
add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a
variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects
can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll
explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few
tips for their use.
Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z
x c v b z ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display.
zc affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not
be affected.
vb affect styles only.
Assigning Effects to the Knobs
001
001
GrandPno
The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above.
It is not possible to assign different effect combinations.
Number/Effect Knob A Knob B
z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance
x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level
c EG Attack Time Release Time
v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance
b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect–
Create Original Sounds
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 19
z Filter
Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies
to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” fre-
quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like
sounds.
* Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.
Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22.
Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of
the sound.
Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff fre-
quency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff
frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter.
x Effect
Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while
chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect.
Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth
of the chorus effect.
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Frequencies in this
range are passed.
Frequencies in this
range are cut off.
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
Level
Chorus
Send Level
Reverb
Send Level
Create Original Sounds
20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
c EG (Envelope Generator)
Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over
time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower
for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sus-
tain to most ideally match the music.
Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach
maximum level when a key is played).
Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to
decay to silence after a key is released).
v Style Filter
In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A
and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the pre-
ceding page.
b Style Tempo
Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob
clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases
the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo.
Release
Time
Attack
Time
Key Played
Sustain Level
Key Released
Time
Level
AT TACK DECAY
RELEASE
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
–No Effect–Tempo
Create Original Sounds
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 21
1
Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard.
The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when
you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice.
For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97
SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead).
2
Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to
select “z FILTER” (“zwill appear in the display).
Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob
B can be used to adjust the resonance.
3
Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the
right).
Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can
result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level.
Using the Knobs
097
SquareLd
097
SquareLd
zappears here.
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
Create Original Sounds
22 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
4
Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the
left hand.
If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the
ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the
same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will
be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting
you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registra-
tion Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any
time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve
created (page 52).
The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects
that can be assigned to the knobs.
Some Ideas for Using the Knobs
Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly
assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first
operated after the new effect has been selected.
Number/Effect Try This
z FILTER
Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 106). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A
while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects.
x EFFECT
Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn
Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the
Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice.
c EG
Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position.
This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys
and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces.
v STYLE FILTER
Select style 39, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set
Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be
a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.
b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo.
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 23
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
The Easy Way to Play Piano
This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature
that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even
though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any
notes and still sound good!
So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can
have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!
Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.
1
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button.
The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature
is on.
2
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be dis-
played. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a differ-
ent song.
For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”.
Play with Both Hands
What is a “Song”?
Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this
instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of
music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with
a range of other functions (page 39).
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT]
button to turn the function on or off.
010
AveMaria
The song displayed here
will be played.
Song number
Song name
The Easy Way to Play Piano
24 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing
the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure.
4
Play on the keyboard.
Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both
hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G,
C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes
will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right.
Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to
“correct” the notes that you play.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/
STOP) button.
Adjusts volume.
Before After
The Easy Way to Play Piano
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 25
5
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the
performance assistant technology feature off.
The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102.
Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands
spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alter-
nately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).
How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where
you play thanks to performance assistant technology!
Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways
of playing produce different results.
Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and
a melody with your right ... or any other combination.
To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a
style with auto accompaniment on.
If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59).
You will get even better
results if you match your
left-hand rhythm to the
rhythm of the chord indica-
tor in the display.
Sounds like you’re
playing the right
notes!
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 1.
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 2.
Play alternately with the left and
right hands—type 3.
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
Play 1 note at a time with your right
hand (for example: index finger
middle finger
ring finger).
Play 3 notes at once with
your right hand.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
26 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.
1
The procedure is that same as that described for playing
Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”.
2
Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the
ninth measure.
Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with
your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds.
When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way
to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part.
3
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the
performance assistant technology feature off.
The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104.
011
Nocturne
The Easy Way to Play Piano
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 27
When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is
too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The
tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons
to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.
You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.
About the Beat Display
The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style.
Change the Song Tempo
Current tempo value
090
Tempo
Second beat Fourth beat
First beat of measure Third beat
28 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,
this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,
strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide
variety of musical sounds.
This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The voice number and name will be displayed.
2
Select the voice you want to play.
While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available
voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected
here becomes the main voice.
For this example select the “092 Flute” voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN
001
GrandPno
Voice number
Voice name
Appears when the Voice mode
is engaged.
•You can also select the voice
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons after pressing the
[VOICE] button. (page 58)
NOTE
f
r
092
Flute
Select 092 Flute
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 29
You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.
The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.
1
Press the [DUAL] button.
The [DUAL] button turns the dual voice on or off.
When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-
rently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when
you play the keyboard.
2
Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a sec-
ond.
“D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently
selected dual voice will be displayed.
3
Select the desired dual voice.
Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.
For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice.
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL
The dual voice feature cannot
be used during a song lesson
(page 43).
NOTE
092
Flute
Dual voice icon
•You can also select the Dual
Voice display by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button and then
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons to select the
“D.Voice” item.
NOTE
f
r
D.Voice
Hold for longer
than a second
110
Marimba
The currently selected
dual voice
109
Vibes
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
30 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.
In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main
and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split
point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72).
1
Press the [SPLIT] button.
The [SPLIT] button turns the split voice on or off.
When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-
rently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split
point.
2
Press and hold the [SPLIT] button for longer than a sec-
ond.
“S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently
selected split voice will be displayed.
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT
Two voices will sound at the same time.
Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice
Split point
The split voice feature cannot
be used during a song lesson
(page 43).
NOTE
092
Flute
Split voice icon
•You can also select the Split
Voice display by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button and then
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons to select the
“S.Voice” item.
NOTE
f
r
Hold for longer
than a second
042
FngrBass
S.Voice
The currently selected
SPLIT voice
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 31
3
Select the desired split voice.
Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice
which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example
try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice.
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.
When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.
Play the Grand Piano Voice
033
Folk Gtr
When you press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button all settings
other than touch sensitivity are
turned off. The dual and split
voices will also be turned off, so
only the Grand Piano voice will
play over the entire keyboard.
NOTE
32 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Fun Sounds
This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can
use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and
much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.
Drum Kit Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “117 Std.Kit1”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!
Try out each key and enjoy the drum and
percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black
keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bon-
gos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of
drum and percussion sounds. For details on
the instruments included in the drum kit
voices (voice numbers 117 to 128), see the
“Drum Kit List” on page 110.
Sound Effect Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “128 SFX Kit2”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!
As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound
of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door,
laughter, and many other useful effects. “127 SFX
Kit1” includes lightning, running water, dogs bark-
ing, and others. Some keys do not have assigned
sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound.
For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit
voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the
“Drum Kit List” on page 110.
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal
instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If
you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percus-
sion instrument.
The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 127 and 128). When either of these
voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.
Drum Kits
Sound Effects
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 33
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Playing Styles
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces
accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to
match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 dif-
ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures
(see page 112 for a complete list of the available styles).
In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.
Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro
trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played
using percussion instruments only.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
The style number and name will appear in the display.
2
Select a style.
Use the dial to select the style you want to use.
A list of all the available styles is provided on page 112.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The style rhythm will start playing.
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop
playback.
Select a Style Rhythm
001
BritRock
Style Number
Style Name
This icon appears when a style
number and name is displayed.
An external style file loaded into
style number 166 can be
selected and used in the same
way as the internal styles. The
style file must be loaded into
style number 166 after transfer-
ring it to the instrument from a
computer. For details, refer to
the section “Loading Style Files”
on page 74.
NOTE
102
PopBossa
Style numbers 141, 153–165
have no rhythm part and there-
fore no rhythm will play if you
use them for the above exam-
ple. For these styles first turn
auto accompaniment on as
described on page 34, press the
[START/STOP] button, and the
accompaniment bass and chord
parts will begin playing when
you play a key to the left of the
keyboard split point.
NOTE
Playing Styles
34 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-
paniment that you can play along with.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.
2
Turn automatic accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment
off.
3
Turn sync start on.
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.
When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a
style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard
split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function
off.
Play Along with a Style
When automatic accompaniment is on ...
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the
“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the
accompaniment chords.
This icon appears when auto-
matic accompaniment is on.
102
PopBossa
The keyboard split point can be
changed as required: refer to
page 72.
NOTE
Split point (54 : F#2)
Auto accompani-
ment region
Flashes when sync
start is on.
102
PopBossa
Playing Styles
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 35
4
Play a left-hand chord to start the style.
You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-
ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.
The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you
play.
5
Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody
with your right hand.
6
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback
when you’re done.
You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.
Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70.
Try this!
Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36.
These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord
progressions sound good with the styles.
Auto accompani-
ment region
Split point
Auto accompani-
ment region
Split point
Playing Styles
36 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords
Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.
In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord
sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same
chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall
feel of the music you play.
On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital
to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take
your accompaniments to a new level.
On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the
instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively
creating a complete song.
Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Play the scores with the left hand.
Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34.
* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to
produce the chord progressions.
—Dance music with simple chords—
This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start
again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.
Recommended Style
039 Euro Trance
Play to the left of the split point.
Split point
F
C G Am
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 37
—3-chord boogie-woogie—
This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the
progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!
—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—
This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When
you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Recommended Style
158 Piano Boogie
Recommended Style
101 Bossa Nova
F
G
F
C C
C
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
G7
E7
Dm CM7
Am A7
FM7
Bm7
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
38 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:
Easy Chords
Standard Chords
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of
the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in
this area of the keyboard.
Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you easily play chords in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only
one, two, or three fingers.
Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you produce accompaniment by
playing chords using normal fingerings in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
G
#
B
b
D
b
E
b
F
#
DEFGABCDEF
Split point (default: 54/F#2)
Root notes and the corresponding keys
Accompaniment
range
•To play a major chord
Press the root note of the chord.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
•To play a minor chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest black key to the left of it.
•To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white key to the left of it.
•To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white and black keys to the left
of it (three keys altogether).
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
CmM7
CM7
C6
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
C7
Cm
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
CmM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
9
)
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
C
(
9
)
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
Cm
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
Cm6
Cm7
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]
* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords
will be recognized without them.
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 39
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Using Songs
With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a
piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,
or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the
performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The
songs are organized by category.
In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly
describe the 30 songs provided.
1
Press the [SONG] button.
The song number and name will be displayed.
You can use the dial to select a different song.
2
Select a song.
Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41.
Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.
Select and Listen to a Song
Listen Lesson Record
Song
011
Nocturne
The currently selected song
and number are displayed
•You can also play songs you
have recorded yourself (User
Songs) or songs that have been
transferred to the instrument
from a computer in the same
way that you play the internal
songs.
NOTE
012
ForElise
The song displayed here
can be played
Using Songs
40 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the
selected song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/
STOP) button again.
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [ ]
(FF), rewind [ ] (REW) and pause [ ] (PAUSE) playback of the song.
001–030 Built in Songs (see next page)
031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).
036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 90–92)
Using the [DEMO/PC] button
Press the [DEMO/PC] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback
will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001).
You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the
[DEMO/PC] button.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/PC] button.
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
Song start!
REW
Press the fast reverse
button to rapidly
return to an earlier
point in the song.
FF
Press the fast forward
button to rapidly skip
ahead to a later point
in the song.
PAUSE
Press the pause but-
ton to pause playback.
When an A-B repeat range is
specified the fast reverse and
forward function will only work
within that range.
NOTE
Using Songs
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 41
Song List
These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature,
songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-
gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.
: Includes chord data.
The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 20, and 30 are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores
for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same
as the original.
Category No. Name Suggested Uses
Main Demo
1 Elements The songs in this category have been created to
give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of
this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for
use with the performance assistant technology
feature.
2 Jessica
3 Chillin
Voice Demo
4Grand Piano Demo
These songs features some of the instrument’s
many useful voices. They make maximum use of
the characteristics of each voice, and might serve
as inspiration for your own compositions.
5Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo
6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo
7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo
8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo
Function Demo
9 Hallelujah Chorus
Use these songs to experience some of the
instrument’s advanced features: song number 9
for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11
for the performance assistant technology feature.
10 Ave Maria
11 Nocturne op.9-2
Piano Solo
12 For Elise
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use
as lesson songs.
13 Maple Leaf Rag
14 The Last Rose of Summer
Piano Ensemble
15 Amazing Grace
A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also
well suited for use as lesson songs.
16 Die Lorelei
17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.
18 Scarborough Fair
19 Old Folks at Home
Piano Accompaniment
20
Ac Ballad
(Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)
When you need to practice backing
(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to
do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited
to play with a band. These songs allow you to
practice backing parts one hand at a time, which
can be the easiest way to master this important
skill.
21 Ep Ballad
22 Boogie Woogie
23 Rock Piano
24 Salsa
25 Country Piano
26 Gospel R&B
27 Medium Swing
28 Jazz Waltz
29 Medium Bossa
30 SlowRock
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
Using Songs
42 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-E413.
Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.
External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.
* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 91 for instructions on how to
transfer the songs to the instrument.
The chart below shows the basic PSR-E413 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and
external song files—from storage to playback.
Types of Songs
Transfer
(page 91)
Record
(page 52)
Your own performance
PSR-E413 Song Storage
locations
Preset Songs
(001–030)
User Songs
(031–035)
Flash Memory
(036–)
The 30 songs built
into the instru-
ment.
Stored in the inter-
nal flash memory.
Save to internal
flash memory. Cur-
rently available.
Play
External song files
can be saved to flash
memory (036–).
Different flash memory areas
are used to store user songs
and external song files trans-
ferred from a computer. User
songs cannot be directly trans-
ferred to the external song file
flash memory area, and vice
versa.
NOTE
Computer
External song file
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 43
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Select a Song For a Lesson
Yamaha Education Suite
You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or
both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) down-
loaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 90–92) Dur-
ing the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play
wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle.
It’s never too late to start learning!
Lesson Flow:
Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!
The practice methods:
Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.
Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct tim-
ing.
Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing
along with the song.
In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you
play the right note.
1
Select a song for your lesson.
Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want
to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song
types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”.
Lesson 1—Waiting
Select the
song you want
to learn.
Select the part you want
to work on (right hand,
left hand, both hands).
Select lesson
1, 2, or 3.
Lesson
start!
Song numbers 10 and 11 are
function demos for perfor-
mance assistant. The lesson
function cannot be used with
them.
NOTE
012
ForElise
Select a Song For a Lesson
44 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
2
Select the part you want to practice.
Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand
lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-
hands lesson.
The currently selected part is shown in the display.
3
Start Lesson 1.
Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the
LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in
sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Lesson 1 …. The
currently selected mode is shown in the display.
Right
Left
BothHand
Right-hand lesson
Left-hand lesson
Both-hands lesson
r1
Waiting
r2
YourTemp
r3
MinusOne
012
ForElise
(Lesson 1)
(Lesson 2)
(Lesson 3)
(Song Lesson off)
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.
Select a Song For a Lesson
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 45
Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the
next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the
correct note.
4
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]
(START/STOP) button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.
See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again
from the beginning.
r1
007
Waiting
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
In this case
r1indicate that right-hand
lesson 1 has been selected.
~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~
~~~~
~~
When the lesson song has played all the way through your
performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very
Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.
Excellent
Very Good
Good
OK
The evaluation feature can be
turned off via the FUNCTION
Grade item (page 85).
NOTE
Select a Song For a Lesson
46 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed
you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own
pace.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
2 on pages 43, 44).
2
Start Lesson 2.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct
timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo
will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original
tempo.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]
(START/STOP) button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.
Lesson 2—Your Tempo
r2
YourTemp
In this case r2” indicate that right-
hand lesson 2 has been selected.
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Select a Song For a Lesson
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 47
Here’s where you can perfect your technique.
The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening
to the song.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
2 on pages 43, 44).
2
Start Lesson 3.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Play the note shown in the display.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ ]
(START/STOP) button.
Lesson 3—Minus One
r3
MinusOne
In this case r3” indicate that right-
hand lesson 3 has been selected.
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Select a Song For a Lesson
48 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to
repeatedly practice a section you find difficult.
Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a les-
son.
The song location will move back four measures from the point at
which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-
sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you
pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back
four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat,
so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button
when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until
you get it right.
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn
•You can change the number of
measures the Repeat and learn
function jumps back by pressing
a number button [1]–[9] during
repeat playback.
NOTE
Press immediately
Oops!
A mistake!
e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback
q
w
Song playback
direction
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 49
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Play Using the Music Database
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to
select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...
simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel
settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds
and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database name will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 114 of
the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that
matches the image of the song you intend to play.
For this example select the “158 Patrol”.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your
right.
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the
left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about
playing chords.
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
001
Jude Hey
Music Database (MDB) files
transferred from a computer can
be selected and used in the same
way as the internal Music Data-
bases (MDB numbers 301–). File
transfer instructions are provided
on page 90.
NOTE
158
Patrol
Split Point
50 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Change a Song’s Style
In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style
to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that
you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa
nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrange-
ments by changing the style with which a song is played.
You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice
for a complete change of image.
The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.
Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah
Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [ ] (START/STOP)
button to play it.
As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the
song remains the same.
Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other
songs as well—any songs that include chord data.
1
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on.
You can use the [SONG] and [STYLE] buttons to select a song or style,
respectively, while the Easy Song Arranger function is on.
2
Select a Song.
Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange.
Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger
Using the Easy Song Arranger
009
Halleluj
Change a Song’s Style
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 51
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the song.
Move on to the next step while the song is playing.
4
Select a style.
Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song
sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will
remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a
suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing.
5
Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.
Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and
name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice.
6
Change the song’s melody voice.
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After
SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected
in step 5 becomes the song’s melody voice.
7
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the
function off.
The indicator will go out.
When playing song numbers
010, 011 and 020 to 030 while
using the Easy Song Arranger,
melody tracks will be automati-
cally muted and no melody will
sound. In order to hear the mel-
ody tracks you will need to
press the SONG MEMORY but-
tons [3] to [5].
NOTE
Song start!
Because the Easy Song
Arranger uses song data you
can’t specify chords by playing
in the accompaniment range of
the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/
OFF] button will not function.
If the time signature of the song
and style are different, the time
signature of the song will be
used.
NOTE
001
GrandPno
The currently selected voice number
and name are displayed here.
Hold for longer than a second
SONG MEL
52 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Record Your Own Performance
You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as
user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on
the instrument.
Recordable Data
You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.
Each track can be recorded individually. To record your own performance, first
use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you
want to record on.
Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts.
Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part.
Track Mute
This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back
while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 79).
1
Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the
user song number (031–035) you want to record to.
Recording Procedure
Up to approximately 10,000
notes can be recorded for the
five user songs if you record
only to the melody tracks. Up to
approximately 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded for
the five user songs if you record
only to the style track.
NOTE
Melody Chords
Specify
track(s) and
record
Tr ac k
1
Tr ac k
2
Tr ac k
3
Tr ac k
4
Tr ac k
5
Tr ac k
A
031
User 1
Rotate the dial to select a song
number between 031 and 035.
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 53
2
Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your
selection on the display.
Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track
Together
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.
The selected tracks will flash in the display.
Record a Melody track
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
The selected track will flash in the display.
3
Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) but-
ton.
The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.
4
Stop recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) or
[REC] button.
To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a
second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off
while recording is in progress.
Style accompaniment is auto-
matically turned on when you
select the style track [A] for
recording.
Style accompaniment cannot
turned on or off while recording
is in progress.
If you use a split voice for
recording, notes played to the
left of the split point will not be
recorded.
NOTE
If you record to a track that
contains previously-recorded
data the previous data will be
overwritten and lost.
CAUTION
Press and hold
rEC
User 1
001
If style accompaniment is on
and track [A] has not yet been
recorded, the style track [A] will
automatically be selected for
recording when a melody track
is selected. If you only want to
record a melody track, be sure
to turn the style track [A] off.
NOTE
rEC
User 1
001
If the memory becomes full dur-
ing recording a warning mes-
sage will appear and recording
will stop automatically. Use the
song clear or track clear (page
55) function to delete unwanted
data and make more room avail-
able for recording, then do the
recording again.
NOTE
Recording
starts
Current measure
rEC
User 1
003
or
Record Your Own Performance
54 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style
track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will
stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to
001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light.
5
When the recording is done ...
To Play Back a User Song
User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39).
1 Press the [SONG] button.
2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial
to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.
3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback.
To Record Other Tracks
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.
By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],
[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded
tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute
previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)
while recording new tracks.
To Re-record a Track
Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal
way.
The new material will overwrite the previous data.
Data Recording Limitations
The split voice cannot be recorded.
The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes
made during the song will not be recorded.
reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,
tempo
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 55
This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).
1
Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–
035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer
than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the song.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the song is being cleared.
This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–
035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],
[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for
longer than a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the track.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the track is being cleared.
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song
If you only want to clear a spe-
cific track from a user song use
the Track Clear function.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second
Press and hold
YES
ClrUser1
•To execute the Song Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Song Clear
operation.
NOTE
YES
ClrTr1
Hold for longer than a second
•To execute the Track Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Track Clear
operation.
NOTE
56 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Backup and Initialization
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.
If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default set-
tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.
Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, reg-
istration memory, user songs, style file 166—turn the power on by pressing the
[STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.
The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.
Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred to the
internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the
[STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key
on the keyboard and the three highest black keys.
Backup
The Backup Parameters
User Songs
Style 166
•Touch Response on/off
•Registration Memory
FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel,
Master EQ type, Sleep
Initialization
When you execute the Flash
Clear operation, data you
have purchased will also be
cleared. Be sure to save data
you want to keep to a com-
puter.
CAUTION
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 57
Overall PSR-E413 control is based on the following simple operations.
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
Basic Operation
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
3 Start a function.
001
001
GrandPno
Display (page 59)
Volume Adjustment
Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the
instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones
plugged into the PHONES jack.
Rotate counter-
clockwise to lower
the volume.
Rotate clockwise
to increase the
volume.
3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
The “ ” symbol that appears next to
some buttons indicates that the button can be
pressed and held for longer than a second to
call up a related function. This provides conve-
nient direct access to a range of functions.
Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.
Select an auto-accompaniment style.
Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.
Basic Operation and Displays
Basic Operation and Displays
58 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can
then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.
Changing Values● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Start a function.
This is the [START/STOP] button.
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]
button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).
012
ForElise
This portion of the display indi-
cates the name and number of
the currently selected song,
voice and style. It also displays
the name and current setting/
value of other functions.
Dial
Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the
value of the selected item, or counter-
clockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate
the dial continuously to continuously
increase or decrease the value.
[+] and [-] Buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to incre-
ment the value by 1, or press the [-]
button briefly to decrement the value
by 1. Press and hold either button to
continuously increment or decre-
ment the value in the corresponding
direction.
Number Buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number
or parameter value.
Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below).
Decrease Increase
Press
briefly to
decrement.
Press
briefly to
increment.
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [3].
Example: Song number “003”
can be entered in three ways.
•[0] [0] [3]
•[0] [3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
•[3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
When selecting a song, style, or voice,
you can use these buttons to jump to the
first item in the next or previous category.
The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
are useful for selecting categorized items,
as in the example below.
Example: VOICE SELECT
In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you
first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the cat-
egory containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-]
buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when
you have to select from a large number of voices.
f
r
Jump to the first item
in the next or previ-
ous category.
f
r
090
SweetFlt
The first voice in the selected
category is selected.
f
r
In most procedures described throughout this owner’s
manual the dial is recommended for selection simply
because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection
method. Please note however, that most items or values
that can be selected using the dial can also be selected
using the [+] and [-] buttons.
Basic Operation and Displays
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 59
The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.
Display Items
001
001
GrandPno
Indicates that Touch response
is turned on. (see page 65)
Indicates that Harmony is
turned on. (see page 60)
Indicates that the Dual voice is
turned on. (see page 29)
Indicates that the Split voice is
turned on. (see page 30)
Indicates that the Arpeggio is
turned on. (see page 14)
Indicates that performance
assistant technology is turned
on. (see
page 23)
Indicates that Accompaniment
is turned on. (see page 34)
Indicates that SYNC STOP is
turned on. (see page 71)
TOUCH
HARMONY
DUAL
SPLIT
ARPEGGIO
Performance assistant technology
ACMP ON
SYNC STOP
Displays the melody and chord
notes of a song when the Song
Lesson function is in use, or the
notes of chords you specify when
the Dictionary function is in use. At
other times the notes you play on
the keyboard are displayed.
Notation
•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indi-
cated by “8va” in the notation.
•For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in
the notation section of the display. This is due to space
limitations in the display.
NOTE
Indicates the beat number in a mea-
sure during the Metronome function.
Indicates the current measure dur-
ing playback of a song or style, and
the currently set Tempo value for the
song or style. (see page 27)
Indicates the name of the chord cur-
rently being played back, or the
name of the chord being played on
the keyboard.
Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see
page 52, 79)
BEAT number and MEASURE
Chord Display
Song Track Display
001
Indicates the current style or song
beat with flashing arrows. (see page
27)
This display allows you to visually
confirm parameters assigned to the
knobs. (see page 18)
Beat Display
Knob Assign Display
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
60 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Adding Effects
This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY] button to turn
Harmony feature on.
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY]
button again.
When you press the [HARMONY] button to
turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony
type for the currently selected main voice is
automatically selected.
2
Press and hold the [HARMONY] button
for longer than a second so that the
Harmony Type item appears.
“HarmType” appears in the display for a few
seconds, and the currently selected harmony
type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a
different harmony type.
3
Use the dial to select a harmony type.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for
information about the available harmony types.
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony
function. The effect and operation of each Har-
mony Type is different-refer to the below sec-
tion “How to sound each Harmony Type” as
well as the Effect Type List for details.
Harmony
When harmony is on the
harmony icon will appear
in the display.
02
Trio
HarmType
The currently selected harmony type
Hold for longer
than a second.
The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual
or Split Voices.
The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony
notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
How to sound each Harmony Type
Harmony type 01 to 05
Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when
the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34).
Hold down two keys.
Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)
Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the
Function Settings (page 69).
Keep holding down the keys.
Keep holding down the keys.
Reference
Adding Effects
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 61
Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum
reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the
procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the Reverb Type item.
“Reverb” appears in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the currently selected reverb type
will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a reverb type.
You can check how the selected reverb type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for
information about the available reverb types.
Adjusting the Reverb Send Level
You can individually adjust the amount of reverb
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 84).
Adding Reverb
100
StyleVol
f
r
02
Hall2
The currently selected reverb type
Reverb
03
Hall3
Selected reverb type
62 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Adding Effects
The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.
When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the Chorus Type item.
“Chorus” appears in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the currently selected chorus type
will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a chorus type.
You can check how the selected chorus type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for
information about the available chorus types.
Adjusting the Chorus Send Level
You can individually adjust the amount of chorus
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 84).
Adding Chorus
f
r
1
Chorus1
Chorus
The currently selected chorus type
2
Chorus2
Selected chorus type
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 63
Handy Performance Features
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature.
Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.
Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Turn the metronome on and start it by
pressing the [METRONOME] button.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-
NOME] button again.
Adjusting the Metronome
Tempo
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call
up the tempo setting.
2
Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to
280.
The Metronome
001
1
GrandPno
1
Indicates the beat number
in the measure
090
Tempo
Current Tempo setting
64 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.
1
Press and hold the [METRONOME] but-
ton for longer than a second to select
the number of beats per measure func-
tion “TimesigN”.
2
Use the dial to select the number of
beats per measure.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each
measure while the other beats will click. All
beats will simply click with no chime at the
beginning of each measure if you set this
parameter to “00”.
The available range is from 0 through 60.
Select 5 for this example.
3
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the beat length function
“TimesigD”.
The currently selected beat length will be dis-
played.
4
Use the dial to select the beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,
or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or
16
th
note). Select 8 for this example.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Metronome Volume
item.
3
Use the dial to set the metronome vol-
ume as required.
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat
Number of beats per measure.
04
TimesigN
Hold for longer than
a second.
The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song
that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style
or song is playing.
NOTE
f
r
04
TimesigD
The length of one beat.
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
f
r
Metronome
volume
100
MtrVol
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 65
You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at
any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/
song will begin playing at the tapped tempo.
When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.
1
Press the [TOUCH] button to turn touch
response on.
The touch response icon will appear in the dis-
play when touch response is on (page 59).
2
Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for
longer than a second so that the Touch
Sensitivity item appears.
“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few
seconds, and the currently selected touch sensi-
tivity will be displayed.
3
Use the dial in response to keyboard
dynamics to select a touch sensitivity
setting between 1 and 3. Higher values
produce greater (easier) volume varia-
tion in response to keyboard dynam-
ics—i.e. greater sensitivity.
Tap Start
Touch Response Sensitivity
001
GrandPno
Touch response icon
TouchSns
Hold for longer
than a second.
Touch Sensitivity
2
Medium
The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.
NOTE
66 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll
the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice
such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects.
Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)
The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone
increments.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Transpose item.
3
Use the dial to set the transpose value
between -12 and +12 as required.
Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)
The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent
increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Tuning item.
3
Use the dial to set the tuning value
between -100 and +100 as required.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Controls
f
r
00
Transpos
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
f
r
000
Tuning
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 67
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the arpeggio velocity function
“ARP Velo”.
ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a
few seconds, then the currently selected arpeg-
gio velocity setting will appear.
3
Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.
When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-
ume is the same regardless of changes in key-
board velocity.
Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics
f
r
1
Original
The currently selected
arpeggio velocity.
ARP Velo
68 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting
feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select
voice number “000” to activate this feature.
1
Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2
on page 28).
2
Select and play back any song (steps 1
to 3 on page 39).
3
Play the keyboard and remember the
sound of the voice.
If you have stopped playback at some point
during this procedure press the [ ]
(START/STOP) button to start playback again.
4
Use the dial to change songs, then play
the keyboard and listen to the voice.
You should hear a different keyboard voice
than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE]
button after changing songs to see the name of
the voice being used.
One Touch Setting
000
SweetSpr
Use the dial to select voice number 000.
Handy Performance Features
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 69
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Harmony Volume
item.
3
Use the dial to set the harmony volume
between 000 and 127.
Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-
ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external
speaker system.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the master EQ type function
“MasterEQ”.
“MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a
few seconds, then the currently selected EQ
type will appear.
3
Use the dial to select the desired Master
EQ setting.
Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and
2 are best for listening via the instrument’s
built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,
and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via
external speakers.
Adjusting the Harmony Volume
f
r
080
HarmVol
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound
f
r
1
Speakerl
MasterEQ
The currently selected
master EQ type.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
70 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of
the Quick Guide.
Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-
dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.
The PSR-E413 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the
accompaniment to match the song you are playing.
INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main sec-
tion. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely
until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style
playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.
Fill-in section
This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.
ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.
The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and then
select a style.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to
turn auto accompaniment on.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
synchro start on.
Pattern Variation (Sections)
Main A/BIntro
Auto fill
Ending
Appears when Auto
Accompaniment is on.
Synchro Start
When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,
style playback will begin as soon as you play a
chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode
by pressing the [SYNC START] button again.
Beat arrows will flash when
the synchro start standby
mode is engaged
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 71
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
You’re now ready to play the intro.
6
As soon as you play a chord with your
left hand, the Intro of the selected Style
starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as
shown below). For information on how to enter
chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment
Chords” on page 38.
7
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly
into the selected main section A/B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
This switches to the ending section.
When the ending is finished, the auto accompa-
niment stops automatically. You can have the
ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
again while the ending is playing back.
MAIN A
The name of the selected section—
MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.
INTRO≥A
Accompaniment
range
Split point
FILL A≥B
Synchro Stop
When this function is selected the accompaniment
style will only play while you are playing chords
in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Style playback will stop when you release the
keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC
STOP] button.
ENDING
Appears when the syn-
chro-stop function is
engaged.
The style will play
while you are playing
the keys
Style playback will
stop when you
release the keys
72 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Style Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the style volume
between 000 and 127.
The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the
procedure described below.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
2
Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for
longer than a second so that the Split
point item appears.
3
Use the dial to set the split point to any
key from 000 through 127.
Adjusting the Style Volume
f
r
100
StyleVol
Setting the Split Point
054
SplitPnt
Hold for longer than a second
Split point
Split point (54 : F#2)
Main voice
Split voice
When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point
also changes.
The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.
NOTE
•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]
button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the
item (page 83).
f
r
NOTE
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 73
When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play
chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the
accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the
instrument can be used (page 38).
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function, then press the [ACMP ON/
OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-
ment on.
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)
102
PopBossa
Appears when auto accompaniment is on
Accompaniment
range
74 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
This instrument features 165 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and
others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style
number 166 and used in the same way as the internal styles.
In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to
the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page
90 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).
The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the
instrument into style number 166.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the style file load function “Sff
Load”.
After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable
style file will appear in the display.
If multiple loadable style files have been trans-
ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or
the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in
sequence.
3
Execute the load operation.
With the name of the style file you want to load
shown in the display, press the number [0] but-
ton.
4
A confirmation message for the load
operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]
button to actually load the file.
Loading Style Files
f
r
Sff Load
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 75
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,
for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the
C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).
In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for
the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and
anchors the other chord notes.
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.
The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad
is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-
tional chords, as shown below.
The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create
different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by
choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).
Reading Chord Names
Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord
(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the
chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a
major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.
Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-E413.)
Chord Basics
3rd
3rd
Root
Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)
CM Cm Caug Cdim
Major chord
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord
Cm
Root note Chord type
Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7
C7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
C7sus4
CmM7
Perfect 5
th
Perfect 4
th
Flatted 7
th
Major chord Flatted 7
th
Minor chord Major 7
th
Major chord
Major 7
th
Minor chord Flatted 5
th
7
th
chord
Flatted 5
th
Minor 7
th
chord
Flatted 7
th
Suspended
4
th
chord
Suspended 4
th
7
th
Minor 7
th
Major 7
th
7
th
, suspended 4
th
Minor 7
th
, flatted 5
th
7
th
, flatted 5
th
Minor/major 7
th
76 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.
* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C
(9)
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6
(9)
*
Major seventh [M7]
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
(9)
*
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7
(#11)
*
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C
b5
*
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7
b5
*
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm
(9)
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7
(9)
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7
(11)
*
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
(9)
*
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7
b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7
b5
*
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7
Seventh [7]
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(b9)
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7
(b13)
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(9)
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7
(#11)
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7
(13)
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(#9)
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7
b5
*
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 C *
C
C
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
C6
CM7
CM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
(
9
)
Cm
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7
(
11
)
CmM7
CmM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
Cdim7
C7
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
C7b5
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
Notes in parentheses can be omitted.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-
niment based only on the root.
•A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.
The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions
can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4,
aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2.
NOTE
•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the
notes shown in parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
•Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
NOTE
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 77
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.
It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1
Press and hold the LESSON [START]
button for longer than a second.
2
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a
GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the
“G” key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The root note you set is shown
in the display.
3
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in
the section of the keyboard labeled
“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The notes you should play for
the specified chord (root note and
chord type) are shown in the display,
both as notation and in the keyboard
diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord,
press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4
Try playing a chord in the auto accom-
paniment section of the keyboard,
checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly,
a bell sound signals your success and
the chord name in the display flash.
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
Dict.
Hold for longer than
a second
001
Dict.
001
Dict.
Notation of chord
Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)
About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only
by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when
specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after
pressing the root note.
NOTE
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
78 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Song Settings
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Song Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the song volume
between 000 and 127.
You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the
start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat
playback.
1
Play the song (page 39) and press the
[] (A-B REPEAT) button at the
beginning of the section you want to
repeat (the “A” point).
2
Press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button
a second time at the end of the section
you want to repeat (the “B” point).
3
The specified A-B section of the song
will now play repeatedly.
You can stop repeat playback at any time by
pressing the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button.
Song Volume
f
r
100
SongVol
Song volume
Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.
NOTE
A-B Repeat
AB
The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure
increments.
The current measure number is shown in the display during play-
back.
If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song
press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback of
the song.
NOTE
Song Settings
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 79
Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the
song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted
part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute
tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.
To mute a track, press the appropriate track button
(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same but-
ton a second time to disengage track muting.
You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.
1
Select the song and play it.
2
Rotate the dial to select the voice you
want to listen to after pressing the
[VOICE] button.
3
Press the [VOICE] button for longer
than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the
display for a few seconds, indicating
that the voice selected in step #2 has
replaced the song’s original melody
voice.
Muting Independent Song Parts
Track number on—Track will playback
Track number off—Track is muted or
contains no data
Change the Melody Voice
•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.
NOTE
050
Strings
SONG MEL
Hold for longer than
a second
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
80 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-
tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved
(8 banks of two setups each).
1
Set the panel controls as required—
select a voice, accompaniment style,
etc.
2
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
3
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a bank number from 1 to
8.
4
Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]
button while holding the [MEMORY/
BANK] button to store the current panel
settings to the specified registration
memory.
8 Banks
Memory 1
Up to 16 presets (eight
banks of two each) can be
memorized.
Memory 2
Saving to the Registration Memory
1
Bank
Bank number
Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-
back.
NOTE
Writing!
If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains
data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.
NOTE
Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-
tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.
CAUTION
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 81
1
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
2
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select bank you want to recall.
3
Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]
or [2], containing the settings you want
to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY
number appears in the display for a few
seconds. The panel controls will be
instantly set accordingly.
Recalling a Registration Memory
Bank number
1
Bank
REGIST 1
1
Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,
Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),
Style Volume, Tempo
Voice settings
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,
Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time,
Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance,
Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings
(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave,
Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,
Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter
Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,
Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)
Effect settings
Reverb Type, Chorus Type
Arpeggio settings
Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF
Harmony settings
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,
Harmony Volume
Other settings
Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign
* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when
using the Song features.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
82 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Setting the Sleep Mode
This instrument has a Sleep Mode function that allows it to automatically go into a low-
power “sleep” mode if not operated for specified period of time. In Sleep Mode all panel
indicators and the display backlight are off to conserve power. The Sleep Mode func-
tion is initially disabled (OFF) by default.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the SLEEP item.
3
Rotate the dial to set the desired time
until Sleep Mode begins (3–20 minutes).
The time can be set in one-minute increments.
Select OFF to disable Sleep Mode (the instru-
ment will not go to sleep). The instrument will
wake from Sleep Mode as soon as a panel con-
trol is operated, a key is pressed, or a MIDI
command is received. No sound will be pro-
duced for approximately two seconds after
waking from sleep.
f
r
Sleep
oFF
Time to Sleep Mode
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 83
The Functions
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-
ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-
tion list starting on the opposite page.
When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display
name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.
1
Find the function you want to set in the
list that begins on page 84.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3
Select a function.
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as
many times as necessary until the function’s
display name appears in the display.
4
Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or
the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the
selected function as required.
The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/
OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.
In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-
tion of the selected function, and the [-] will
cancel the selection.
Some Function settings are stored in memory
as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup
Parameters” on page 56 for information on the
function settings that are stored on the instru-
ment.
To restore all initial factor default settings per-
form the “Backup Clear” procedure described
in the “Initialization” section on page 56.
Selecting and Setting Functions
100
StyleVol
f
r
00
Transpos
The selected function.
Direct numeric
entry.
•Increment value by 1.
•ON
•Execute
Decrement value by 1.
OFF
Cancel
Press simultaneously to
recall the default setting.
84 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
Function Setting List
Setting Item title Range/Settings Description
Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.
Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.
Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.
Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.
Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.
Split Point SplitPnt
000–127
(C-2–G8)
Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—
in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)
voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are
automatically set to the same value.
Touch Sensitivity TouchSns
1(Soft),
2(Medium),
3(Hard)
When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the
feature.
Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.
Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.
Main Voice Pan M.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time.
Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time.
Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency.
Main Voice Filter
Resonance
M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance.
Dual Voice D.Voice 001–509 Selects the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Pan D.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time.
Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time.
Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency.
Dual Voice Filter
Resonance
D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance.
Split Voice S.Voice 001–509 Selects the Split voice.
Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.
Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.
Split Voice Pan S.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
The Functions
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 85
*All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is
Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)
Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 117)
Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 117)
Master EQ Type MasterEQ
Speaker1,
Speaker2,
Headphone,
Line Out1,
Line Out2
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in
different listening situations.
Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 117)
Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–100 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14)
Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo
1 (Original),
2 (Thru)
Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.
Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file.
PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 89).
Local On/Off Local ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone
generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 88)
External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock
(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 88)
Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is
transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Style playback.
Song Out SongOut ON/OFF
Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Song playback.
Initial Send InitSend YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to
send, or press [-] to cancel.
Time Signature
Numerator
TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
Time Signature
Denominator
TimesigD
Half note,
Quarter note,
Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
Sets the length of each metronome beat.
Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson Track (R) R-Part
GuideTrack
1–16
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The
setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a
computer.
Lesson Track (L) L-Part
GuideTrack
1–16
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting
is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.
Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.
Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to
ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/PC] button is
pressed.
Sleep Sleep 3–20, OFF Sets the amount of time before the instrument will go into Sleep Mode.
Setting Item title Range/Settings Description
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
86 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers,
sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide stan-
dard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Natu-
rally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as
well as the songs, styles and panel settings.
The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is
enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI
data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions pro-
vided by this instrument.
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic
instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world
today, these are the two main categories of instru-
ments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical
guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They
are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a
key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a
string and the note sounds. But how does a digital
instrument go about playing a note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic
instrument the sampling note (previously recorded
note) stored in the tone generator section (elec-
tronic circuit) is played based on information
received from the keyboard. So then what is the
information from the keyboard that becomes the
basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
using the grand piano sound on the instrument.
Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a reso-
nated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-
mation from the keyboard such as “with what
voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”,
“when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”.
Then each piece of information is changed into a
number value and sent to the tone generator. Using
these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays
the stored sampling note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Your keyboard performance and all panel opera-
tions of this instrument are processed as MIDI
data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and
User songs are also made up of MIDI data.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instru-
ment Digital Interface and it allows different musi-
cal instruments and devices to instantly
communicate with each other, via digital data. The
MIDI standard is used all over the world and was
designed to transmit performance data between
electronic musical instruments (or computers).
Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument
from another and transmit performance data
between the devices-taking your creative and per-
formance potential to even higher levels.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:
Channel messages and System messages.
What Is MIDI?
Acoustic guitar note production
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Digital instrument note production
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note
stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.
Playing the keyboard
Tone Generator
(Electronic circuit)
LR
Sampling
Note
Sampling
Note
Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed
numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 87
Channel Messages
This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI
channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up
to sixteen different instruments at the same time.
Channel messages transmit information such as
Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16
channels.
System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire
MIDI system. System messages include messages
like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique
to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime
Messages that control the MIDI device.
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.
Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 88).
Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 90).
The connection procedure is as follows:
1
Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-
puter.
The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on
page 93.
2
Connect the USB terminal of the computer
to the USB terminal on the instrument using
an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sep-
arately).
The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft
Downloader application that allows you to transfer
song files from your computer to the instrument’s
flash memory. For instructions about how to install
Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song
files, see page 91.
Precautions when using the USB termi-
nal
When connecting the computer to the USB termi-
nal, make sure to observe the following points.
Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and
corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the
instrument freezes, restart the application software
or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instru-
ment off then on again.
Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF
Performance data of the keyboard (contains
note number and velocity data)
Program Change
Instrument selection (including bank select
MSB/LSB, if necessary)
Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.)
Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting
Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc.
Realtime Messages Start/stop operation
Connecting a Personal Computer
USB cable
PSR-E413
Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from
any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended,
sleep, standby).
Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-
puter to the USB terminal.
•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument
on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB ter-
minal.
Quit any open application software on the computer.
Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-
ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard
or play back a song, etc.)
While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should
wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when
turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when
alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
CAUTION
88 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-
puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.
When the instrument is connected with computer,
it transmits/receives performance data.
MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the item you want to change its
value.
3
Use the dial to select ON or OFF.
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer
USB cable
USB terminalUSB terminal
PSR-E413
Item Range/Settings Description
Local ON/OFF
Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when
local control is off.
External Clock ON/OFF
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to
a clock signal from an external device (ON).
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.
If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this may be the
most likely cause.
CAUTION
If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from
an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will
not start.
CAUTION
f
r
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 89
PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A number of MIDI settings need to be made when
you want to transfer performance data between the
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,
PC2, and OFF.
This setting is not necessary when transferring
song or backup files between the computer and the
instrument.
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-
book.
1
Press and hold the [DEMO/PC] button
for longer than a second so that the PC
Mode item appears.
2
Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on
your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the
panel.
Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To use the remote control functions, simulta-
neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-
board (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key
(shown below).
PC1 PC2* OFF
Local OFF OFF ON
External Clock ON OFF OFF
Song Out OFF OFF OFF
Style Out OFF OFF OFF
Keyboard Out OFF ON ON
oFF
PC mode
When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.
NOTE
•You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
locate it (page 83).
f
r
NOTE
Remote Control of MIDI Devices
C1
C#1
C6: Fast forward
B5: Start
A5: Stop
G5: Rewind
F5: Top (move to the beginning
of the song)
E5: Metronome ON/OFF
Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2
mode.
NOTE
90 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup
data before the actual performance data.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY
[] and [ ]
buttons
to select the Initial Send item.
3
Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]
to cancel.
Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a
computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-
ferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be
transferred from the instrument to the computer
and back.
In order to transfer files between your computer
and the instrument you will need to install the
Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM
on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-
ROM Installation Guide on page 93 for installation
details.
With the Musicsoft
Downloader You Can.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Transfer files from the computer to the instru-
ment’s flash memory.
refer to the procedure described on
page 91.
The procedure for transferring songs included
on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-
puter to the instrument is given as an example.
Initial Send
f
r
Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument
Data that can be transferred from a com-
puter to this instrument.
• Data Capacity: 373 KB
256 files total for the Song, Style and
Music Database.
• Data Format
Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1
Style: (.sty)
Music Database: (.mfd)
Backup File: 08PK61.bup
What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?
The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the
most common and widely compatible sequence
formats used for storing sequence data. There are
two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large
number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF
Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI
sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 91
Backup files can be transferred from the instru-
ment to a computer and back.
refer to the procedure described on
page 92.
Use Musicsoft Downloader
To Transfer Songs From the
Accessory CD-ROM To the
Instrument’s flash memory
● ● ● ● ●
1
Install the Musicsoft Downloader and
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then
connect the computer and the instru-
ment (page 95).
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
3
Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader
shortcut icon that is created on the
desktop.
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader
application and the main window will appear.
4
Click the “Add File” button and the Add
File window will appear.
5
Click the button to the right of Look in”
and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-
down menu that appears. Double-click the
“SampleData” Folder on the window. Select
the file from the “SongData” Folder you
want to transfer to the instrument, and click
“Open”.
At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-
base file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer
it to the instrument in the same way as a song file.
6
A copy of the selected MIDI song file
will appear in the “List of files stored
temporarily” at the top of the window.
The memory medium will also be displayed at
the bottom of the window to specify the desti-
nation for the transfer. Click the “Electronic
Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash mem-
ory.
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.
NOTE
The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader
is running.
NOTE
q Click the CD-ROM drive
w Double-click “SampleData” Folder
“SongData” Folder, and click a
song file.
e Click “Open”
q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,
and then “Flash Memory”
92 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
7
After selecting the file in the “List of
files stored temporarily”, click the
downward [Move] button and a confir-
mation message will appear. Click [OK]
and the song will be transferred from
the “List of files stored temporarily” to
the instrument’s memory.
8
Close the window to end the Musicsoft
Downloader.
9
To playback a song stored in flash
memory, press the [SONG] button.
Use the dial to select the song you want
to play, then press the
[] (START/
STOP)
button to start playback.
Transfer a backup file from
the instrument to a computer
● ● ●
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer
“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56),
including the five User Songs stored on the instru-
ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-
cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader
display, and then “System Drive”, a file named
“08PK61.bup” will appear in the lower right corner
of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the
backup file. For details about how to transmit
backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-
cation, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data
Between the Computer and Instrument (for unpro-
tected data)” in the application.
To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...
In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)
transferred from a computer for lessons it is
necessary to specify which channels are to be
played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.
1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song
(036–) residing in flash memory for which you
want to set the guide track.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
select the R-Part or L-Part item.
4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to
play back as the specified right- or left-hand
part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.
End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from
your computer.
NOTE
Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only
will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the
memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-
appear completely when the power is turned on or off.
CAUTION
Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or
improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a
copy of all important data stored on your computer.
•We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than bat-
teries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the
batteries fail during the transfer.
CAUTION
f
r
Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.
NOTE
The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/
received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be over-
written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when
transferring data.
CAUTION
Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will
not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.
CAUTION
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 93
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon
breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of
this manual before installing the application.)
Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden
without the written consent of the manufacturer.
•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-
not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.
This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).
Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.
Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.
The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different
from the screens which appear on your computer.
Data Types
This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 95 for software installation instructions.
Operating System (OS)
The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Important Notices about the CD-ROM
Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other
than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hear-
ing damage or damage to the playback device.
CAUTION
94 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.
You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/
Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Please read the Software License Agreement on
page 121 before opening the CD-ROM package.
1
Check the system requirements to
make sure that the software will run on
your computer.
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
The start window should appear automatically.
3
Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com-
puter.
Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on
page 95 for installation and setup instructions.
4
Connect the instrument to the com-
puter.
The connection procedure is described on page
87.
5
Install the software.
Musicsoft Downloader:
See page 97.
6
Launch the software.
For further software operation refer to the online
help supplied with the software.
Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 98 when
you have trouble with installing the driver.
CD-ROM Contents
qe
wr
Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents
q
MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader
This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet
and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.
w
DMN_ Digital Music Notebook
Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and
online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your
favorite songs.
You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions
with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.
DMN_FlashDemo
Digital Music Notebook
Flash Demo
Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital
Music Notebook.
e
SongBook Song Book
Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as
well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs
1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11
are provided in this manual beginning on page 100.
r
USBdrv2k_
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows 2000/XP)
This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer
via USB.
USBdrvVista_
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows Vista/XP x64)
SampleData
SongData MIDI 70 songs
These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the
instrument and played or used with the instrument functions.
StyleData 5 style files
MDB 5 music database files
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 95
Installing the USB-MIDI Driver
● ● ● ●
In order to be able to communicate with and use
MIDI devices connected to your computer, the
appropriate driver software must be properly
installed on your computer.
The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software
and similar applications on your computer to trans-
mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI
devices via a USB cable.
•Windows 2000 installation page 96.
•Windows XP installation page 96.
•Windows Vista installation page 97
System Requirements
Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display
Musicsoft Downloader
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional/
Vista
* Only 32-bit is supported.
233 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family
(500 MHz or higher is
recommended)
64 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 128 MB of
free space (at least
512 MB of free
space is
recommended)
800 x 600
HighColor
(16-bit)
USB Driver for Windows
2000/XP
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional
166 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family
32 MB or more
(64 MB or more is
recommended)
at least 3 MB of free
space
USB Driver for Windows
Vista/XP x64
Windows Vista/XP
Professional x64 Edition
800 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family or Intel
®
64 compatible processor
512 MB or more
at least 3 MB of free
space
Digital Music Notebook
Windows XP Home/
Professional Edition,
Service Pack 1a (SP1a)
more/Windows Vista
* Only 32-bit is supported.
400 MHz or higher
processor clock speed
(Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family, or
compatible processor
recommended)
128 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 150 MB of
free space
1024 x 768
HighColor
(16-bit)
Digital Music Notebook
(Requirements for
playing content with
video included.)
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional/
Vista
* Only 32-bit is supported.
1 GHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family (1.4 GHz
or more is recommended)
256 MB or more
Software Installation
Uninstall (Removing the Software)
Installed software can be removed from your
computer as follows:
From the Windows Start menu select Start
Settings Control panel Add or Remove
Applications Install and Uninstall. Select the
item you want to remove and click [Add or
Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to
remove the selected software.
The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on
the OS version you are using.
NOTE
Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you
will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is
displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My
Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-
ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.
Driver
USB
Cable
MIDI device
Computer
Sequence
software
96 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Installing the driver on Windows 2000
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows
2000.
2
Select [My Computer] [Control Panel]
[System] [Hardware] [Driver Sign-
ing] [File Signature Verification], and
check the radio button to the left of
“Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file
signature” and click [OK].
3
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
4
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system automatically
launches the Found New Hardware Wiz-
ard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may
take a while to display the Wizard win-
dow.)
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-
tion of the Owner’s Manual.
5
Select the radio button for “Search for a
suitable driver for my device [recom-
mended]”, then click [Next].
6
Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,
deselect all other check boxes, then click
[Next].
7
Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-
ers”, then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
Installing the driver on Windows XP
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows XP.
2
Select [Start] [Control Panel]. If the
control panel appears as “Pick a cate-
gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in
the upper left of the window. All control
panels and icons will be displayed.
3
Go to [System] [Hardware] [Driver
Signing Options] and check the radio but-
ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].
4
Click the [OK] button to close System
Properties, and then click “X” in the upper
right of the window to close the Control
Panel.
5
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
6
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system launches the Found
New Hardware Wizard automatically. Oth-
erwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”
section of the Owner’s Manual. If the sys-
tem displays “Found New Hardware” in
the lower right corner, wait until Wizard
window is displayed. (Some computers
may take a while to display the window.)
If the Wizard window prompts you to specify
whether or not to connect to Windows Update,
select the radio button for “No, not this time”,
then click [Next].
7
Select the radio button for “Install the
software automatically (recommended)”,
then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in
the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-
dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during
detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,
D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.
NOTE
If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to
install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].
NOTE
If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-
dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click
[Continue Anyway].
NOTE
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 97
10
When using Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition, the Support Module must
be installed.
After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the
connected USB devices, select “My Computer”
from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM
icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu.
Select “USBdrvVista_”
“XPx64SupportModule” “Setup.exe” and
launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen direc-
tions.
Installing the driver in Windows Vista
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on to Windows Vista.
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
3
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system automatically
launches the “Found New Hardware” win-
dow. Click “Locate and install driver soft-
ware (recommended)”.
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-
tion of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers
may take a while to display the window.).
4
If a message allowing Windows to search
online for driver software appears, click
“Don’t search online.
5
If a message prompting you to insert the
disk that came with your device appears,
click [Next].
The system starts the installation.
6
When the installation is complete, the
system displays the message “The soft-
ware for this device has been success-
fully installed. Click [Close].
(Some computers may take a while to display the
window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
Installing the Musicsoft
Downloader and Digital
Music Notebook Applications
● ● ●
1
Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your
computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-
dow will appear automatically showing
software applications.
2
Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital
Music Notebook].
3
Click the [install] button, and follow the
on-screen instructions to install the soft-
ware.
For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-
tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music
Notebook application and click “Help”.
For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions
see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft
Downloader application and click “Help”.
*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft
Downloader at the following Internet URL.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Pro-
fessional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.
NOTE
Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,
even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-
MIDI driver.
NOTE
If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].
NOTE
If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is
authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].
NOTE
•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows
2000, XP or Vista.
•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows
XP or Vista.
IMPORTANT
When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-
net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.
IMPORTANT
Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-
book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for
some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make
sure that your credit card can be used.
IMPORTANT
Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBEL-
IUSSCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully
agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the
AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application.
NOTE
If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your
“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and
select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and
proceed to step 2, below.
NOTE
Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between
this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application
can be used.
IMPORTANT
98 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Troubleshooting
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the
USB cable, then connect it again.
Is the USB function enabled on your computer?
When you connect the instrument to the computer for
the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard”
does not appear, the USB function on the computer
may be disabled. Perform the following steps.
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear
at “Universal serial bus controller” or
“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”
mark, the USB controller is disabled.
Is any unknown device registered?
If driver installation fails, the instrument will be
marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be
able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown
device” by following the steps below.
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel]
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu
“View devices by type”.
3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it
to extend the tree to look for “Unknown
device”. If one appears, select it and click
the [Remove] button.
4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-
ment, and make the connection again.
5 Install the driver again.
•Windows 2000 users........ see page 96
•Windows XP users........... see page 96
•Windows Vista users ....... see page 97
Did you install the driver? (page 95)
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
•Are the volume settings of the instrument, play-
back device, and application program set to the
appropriate levels?
•Have you selected an appropriate port in the
sequence software?
•Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The
latest driver can be downloaded from the following
web site.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Does your computer satisfy the system require-
ments?
Is any other application or device driver running?
Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI
application is running.
You may not be able to suspend/resume normally,
depending on the particular environment (USB Host
Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and
connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the
instrument functions again.
[Windows 2000/XP/Vista]
1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log on Windows.
Close all applications and windows that are open.
2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
3 Select “My Computer” from the Start
menu.
4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select
“Open” from the pop-up menu.
5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_”
folder
“uninstall” folder
“uninstall.exe” file and launch
“uninstall.exe. file.
Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the
driver.
6 A message asking you to restart your
computer in order to complete the
uninstall procedure will appear.
Driver removal will be complete when you have
restarted your computer.
The driver cannot be installed.
When controlling the instrument from
your computer via USB, the instrument
does not operate correctly or no sound
is heard.
Playback response is delayed.
Cannot suspend or resume the
computer correctly.
How can I remove the driver?
When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from
“USBdrvVista_” folder.
NOTE
If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].
NOTE
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 99
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interfer-
ence. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the
instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or
when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 88.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area
are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.
The style or song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to
“External Clock” on page 88.
The style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 84) is set to an appropriate level.
Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the
split point at an appropriate key (page 72).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number
141 or a style between 153 and 165 (Pianist).
This is not a malfunction. Style number 141 and style numbers 153–165 (Pia-
nist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin
playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if
style playback is turned on.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or
Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time,
some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or
song.
Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes
simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t
sound when playing arpeggios.
You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony
(the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the
instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes
are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback
functions.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch
cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is
properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note.
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual
sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played.
Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are
going to use any style-related function.
There is no harmony sound.
The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types
01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompani-
ment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range.
Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12
you need to play two notes at the same time.
No sound is produced for about two seconds after the
instrument wakes from sleep mode.
This is normal. The speakers are muted for about two seconds, until the instru-
ment wakes fully from the sleep mode.
Appendix
100 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Scores
This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.
Hallelujah Chorus
Song No. 9 qq
qq
=123
(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)
Scores
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 101
Scores
102 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Ave Maria
Song No. 10 qq
qq
=61
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
Repeatedly Play the Same Key.
P.A.T.
Your Turn.
Type =CHORD
Scores
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 103
Scores
104 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Nocturne op.9-2
Song No. 11 qq
qq
=108
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
P.A.T.
You Can Even Play the Same Keys!
Type =CHORD
Scores
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 105
106 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-
less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most
recent notes have priority (last note priority).
Panel Voice List
The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for
each voice. Use these program change numbers when
playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.
Program change numbers are often specified as numbers
“0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,
in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-
mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate
sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program
change number 1.
Some voices may sound continuously or have a long
decay after the notes have been released while the sus-
tain pedal (footswitch) is held.
NOTE
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
10112 1 Grand Piano
20112 2 Bright Piano
30112 7 Harpsichord
40112 4 Honky-tonk Piano
50112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
60113 3 CP 80
E.PIANO
70114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
80113 6 Hyper Tines
90112 5 Funky Electric Piano
10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
12 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ
14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ
15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
17 0 112 19 Rock Organ
18 0 114 19 Purple Organ
19 0 112 18 Click Organ
20 0 116 17 Bright Organ
21 0 127 19 Theater Organ
22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
25 0 112 20 Church Organ
26 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
29 0 113 24 Bandoneon
30 0 113 23 Modern Harp
31 0 112 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
32 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
33 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
34 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
35 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar
36 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
37 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
38 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
39 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
40 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
41 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
42 0 112 34 Finger Bass
43 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
44 0 112 35 Pick Bass
45 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
46 0 112 37 Slap Bass
47 0 112 39 Synth Bass
48 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
49 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
50 0 112 49 String Ensemble
51 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
52 0 113 50 Slow Strings
53 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
54 0 112 51 Synth Strings
55 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
56 0 112 41 Violin
57 0 112 43 Cello
58 0 112 44 Contrabass
59 0 112 47 Harp
60 0 112 106 Banjo
61 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
62 0 112 53 Choir
63 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
64 0 112 55 Air Choir
65 0 112 54 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
66 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax
67 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax
68 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
69 0 112 66 Alto Sax
70 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
71 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
72 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
73 0 112 72 Clarinet
74 0 112 69 Oboe
75 0 112 70 English Horn
76 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
77 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet
78 0 112 57 Trumpet
79 0 112 58 Trombone
80 0 113 58 Trombone Section
81 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
82 0 112 61 French Horn
83 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
84 0 112 62 Brass Section
85 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
86 0 113 63 80’s Brass
87 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
88 0 114 63 Techno Brass
89 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
90 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute
91 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute
92 0 112 74 Flute
93 0 112 73 Piccolo
94 0 112 76 Pan Flute
95 0 112 75 Recorder
96 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
97 0 112 81 Square Lead
98 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 107
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List
99 0 115 82 Analogon
100 0 119 82 Fargo
101 0 112 99 Star Dust
102 0 112 86 Voice Lead
103 0 112 101 Brightness
SYNTH PAD
104 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
105 0 112 95 Equinox
106 0 112 89 Fantasia
107 0 113 90 Dark Moon
108 0 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
109 0 112 12 Vibraphone
110 0 112 13 Marimba
111 0 112 14 Xylophone
112 0 112 115 Steel Drums
113 0 112 9 Celesta
114 0 112 11 Music Box
115 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
116 0 112 48 Timpani
DRUM KITS
117 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
118 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
119 127 0 9 Room Kit
120 127 0 17 Rock Kit
121 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
122 127 0 26 Analog Kit
123 127 0 113 Dance Kit
124 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
125 127 0 41 Brush Kit
126 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
127 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
128 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
ARPEGGIO
129 0 112 49 Concerto
130 0 112 46 Pizzicato
131 0 112 1 Piano Ballad
132 0 96 82 Synth Sequence
133 0 117 28 Guitarist
134 0 112 37 Pauls Bass
135 0 113 39 Trance Bass
136 0 6 82 SynthChords
137 0 113 39 Acid Bass
138 0 112 8 Funky Clavi
139 0 112 18 ReggaeOrgan
140 0 112 47 Harpeggio
141 0 112 2 SalsaPIano
142 0 115 82 AnalogSequence
143 0 6 82 Sawtooth
144 0 112 1 Piano Arpeggio
145 0 112 25 Guitar Arpeggio
146 127 0 113 ClubBeat
147 127 0 1 R&B Loop
148 127 0 113 ClubAdds
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
149 0 0 1 Grand Piano
150 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
151 0 40 1 Piano Strings
152 0 41 1 Dream
153 0 0 2 Bright Piano
154 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
155 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
156 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
157 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
158 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano
159 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
160 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
161 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
162 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
163 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
164 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
*165 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
166 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
167 0 0 7 Harpsichord
168 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
169 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
170 0 0 8 Clavi
171 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
CHROMATIC
172 0 0 9 Celesta
173 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
174 0 0 11 Music Box
175 0 64 11 Orgel
176 0 0 12 Vibraphone
177 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
178 0 0 13 Marimba
179 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
180 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
181 0 97 13 Balimba
182 0 98 13 Log Drums
183 0 0 14 Xylophone
184 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
185 0 96 15 Church Bells
186 0 97 15 Carillon
187 0 0 16 Dulcimer
188 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
189 0 96 16 Cimbalom
190 0 97 16 Santur
ORGAN
191 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ
192 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
193 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
194 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
195 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
196 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
197 0 40 17 16+2'2/3
198 0 64 17 Organ Bass
199 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
200 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
201 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
202 0 0 18 Percussive Organ
203 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ
204 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
205 0 33 18 Light Organ
206 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
207 0 0 19 Rock Organ
208 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
209 0 65 19 Slow Rotary
210 0 66 19 Fast Rotary
211 0 0 20 Church Organ
212 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
213 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
214 0 40 20 Notre Dame
215 0 64 20 Organ Flute
216 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
217 0 0 21 Reed Organ
218 0 40 21 Puff Organ
219 0 0 22 Accordion
220 0 0 23 Harmonica
221 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
222 0 0 24 Tango Accordion
223 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
GUITAR
224 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar
225 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
226 0 96 25 Ukulele
227 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
228 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
229 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
230 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
231 0 96 26 Mandolin
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
108 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
232 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
233 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
234 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
235 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
236 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
237 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
238 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
239 0 45 29 Jazz Man
240 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
241 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
242 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
243 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar
244 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
245 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics
246 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
247 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
BASS
248 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
249 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
250 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
251 0 0 34 Finger Bass
252 0 18 34 Finger Dark
253 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
254 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
255 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
256 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
257 0 0 35 Pick Bass
258 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
259 0 0 36 Fretless Bass
260 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
261 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
262 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
263 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
264 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
265 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
266 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
267 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
268 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
269 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
270 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
271 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
272 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
273 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
*274 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
275 0 41 40 DX Bass
STRINGS
276 0 0 41 Violin
277 0 8 41 Slow Violin
278 0 0 42 Viola
279 0 0 43 Cello
280 0 0 44 Contrabass
281 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
282 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
283 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
284 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
285 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
286 0 40 47 Yang Chin
287 0 0 48 Timpani
ENSEMBLE
288 0 0 49 Strings 1
289 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
290 0 8 49 Slow Strings
291 0 35 49 60’s Strings
292 0 40 49 Orchestra
293 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
294 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
295 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
296 0 0 50 Strings 2
297 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
298 0 8 50 Legato Strings
299 0 40 50 Warm Strings
300 0 41 50 Kingdom
301 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
302 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
303 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
304 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
305 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
306 0 40 53 Choir Strings
307 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
308 0 0 55 Synth Voice
309 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
310 0 41 55 Choral
311 0 64 55 Analog Voice
312 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit
313 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
314 0 64 56 Impact
BRASS
315 0 0 57 Trumpet
316 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
317 0 0 58 Trombone
318 0 18 58 Trombone 2
319 0 0 59 Tuba
320 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
321 0 0 61 French Horn
322 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
323 0 32 61 French Horn 2
324 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
325 0 0 62 Brass Section
326 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
327 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
328 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
329 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
330 0 18 64 Soft Brass
331 0 41 64 Choir Brass
REED
332 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
333 0 0 66 Alto Sax
334 0 40 66 Sax Section
335 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
336 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
337 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
338 0 0 69 Oboe
339 0 0 70 English Horn
340 0 0 71 Bassoon
341 0 0 72 Clarinet
PIPE
342 0 0 73 Piccolo
343 0 0 74 Flute
344 0 0 75 Recorder
345 0 0 76 Pan Flute
346 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
347 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
348 0 0 79 Whistle
349 0 0 80 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
350 0 0 81 Square Lead
351 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
352 0 8 81 LM Square
353 0 18 81 Hollow
354 0 19 81 Shroud
355 0 64 81 Mellow
356 0 65 81 Solo Sine
357 0 66 81 Sine Lead
358 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead
359 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
360 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
361 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
362 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
363 0 20 82 Big Lead
364 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
365 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
366 0 65 83 Pure Lead
367 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
368 0 0 85 Charang Lead
369 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
370 0 0 86 Voice Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 109
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.
371 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
372 0 35 87 Big Five
373 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
374 0 16 88 Big & Low
375 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
376 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
SYNTH PAD
377 0 0 89 New Age Pad
378 0 64 89 Fantasy
379 0 0 90 Warm Pad
380 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
381 0 0 92 Choir Pad
382 0 66 92 Itopia
383 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
384 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
385 0 0 95 Halo Pad
386 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
SYNTH EFFECTS
387 0 0 97 Rain
388 0 65 97 African Wind
389 0 66 97 Carib
390 0 0 98 Sound Track
391 0 27 98 Prologue
392 0 0 99 Crystal
393 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
394 0 14 99 Popcorn
395 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
396 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
397 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
398 0 41 99 Clear Bells
399 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
400 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
401 0 70 99 Air Bells
402 0 71 99 Bell Harp
403 0 72 99 Gamelimba
404 0 0 100 Atmosphere
405 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
406 0 19 100 Hollow Release
407 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
408 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
409 0 65 100 Harp Vox
410 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
411 0 0 101 Brightness
412 0 0 102 Goblins
413 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
414 0 65 102 Creeper
415 0 67 102 Ritual
416 0 68 102 To Heaven
417 0 70 102 Night
418 0 71 102 Glisten
419 0 96 102 Bell Choir
420 0 0 103 Echoes
421 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
WORLD
422 0 0 105 Sitar
423 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
424 0 35 105 Sitar 2
425 0 97 105 Tamboura
426 0 0 106 Banjo
427 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
428 0 96 106 Rabab
429 0 97 106 Gopichant
430 0 98 106 Oud
431 0 0 107 Shamisen
432 0 0 108 Koto
433 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
434 0 97 108 Kanoon
435 0 0 109 Kalimba
436 0 0 110 Bagpipe
437 0 0 111 Fiddle
438 0 0 112 Shanai
PERCUSSIVE
439 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
440 0 96 113 Bonang
441 0 97 113 Altair
442 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
443 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
444 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
445 0 0 114 Agogo
446 0 0 115 Steel Drums
447 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
448 0 98 115 Thai Bells
449 0 0 116 Woodblock
450 0 96 116 Castanets
451 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
452 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
453 0 0 118 Melodic Tom
454 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
455 0 65 118 Real Tom
456 0 66 118 Rock Tom
457 0 0 119 Synth Drum
458 0 64 119 Analog Tom
459 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
460 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
SOUND EFFECTS
461 0 0 121 Fret Noise
462 0 0 122 Breath Noise
463 0 0 123 Seashore
464 0 0 124 Bird Tweet
465 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
466 0 0 126 Helicopter
467 0 0 127 Applause
468 0 0 128 Gunshot
469 64 0 1 Cutting Noise
470 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
471 64 0 4 String Slap
472 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
473 64 0 33 Shower
474 64 0 34 Thunder
475 64 0 35 Wind
476 64 0 36 Stream
477 64 0 37 Bubble
478 64 0 38 Feed
479 64 0 49 Dog
480 64 0 50 Horse
481 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
482 64 0 56 Maou
483 64 0 65 Phone Call
484 64 0 66 Door Squeak
485 64 0 67 Door Slam
486 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
487 64 0 69 Scratch Split
488 64 0 70 Wind Chime
489 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
490 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
491 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
492 64 0 83 Car Passing
493 64 0 84 Car Crash
494 64 0 85 Siren
495 64 0 86 Train
496 64 0 87 Jet Plane
497 64 0 88 Starship
498 64 0 89 Burst
499 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
500 64 0 91 Submarine
501 64 0 97 Laugh
502 64 0 98 Scream
503 64 0 99 Punch
504 64 0 100 Heartbeat
505 64 0 101 Footsteps
506 64 0 113 Machine Gun
507 64 0 114 Laser Gun
508 64 0 115 Explosion
509 64 0 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
110 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
•“ indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in
“117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to
be played alternately with each other.)
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Voice No. 117 118 119 120 121 122
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy
Snare Snappy Electro
Snare Noisy 4
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2
46 A# 134A# 0Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H Short
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
Drum Kit List
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 111
Voice No. 117 123 124 125 126 127 128
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3
Telephone Ring 2
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
Hand Cymbal Short
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Train
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
Starship
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
112 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1 BritRock
2 8BtModrn
3 Cool 8Bt
4 60sGtPop
5 8BtAdria
6 60s8Beat
7 BblgumPp
8 BritPpSw
9 8Beat
10 Off Beat
11 60s Rock
12 HardRock
13 RockShfl
14 8Bt Rock
16BEAT
15 16Beat
16 PopShf 1
17 PopShf 2
18 Gtr Pop
19 16Bt Up
20 KoolShfl
21 JazzRock
22 HH Light
BALLAD
23 PianoBld
24 LoveSong
25 68Modern
26 68SlowRk
27 68OrcBld
28 OrganBld
29 Pop Bld
30 16Bld 1
31 16Bld 2
DANCE
32 ClubBeat
33 Electron
34 FunkyHse
35 ChartR&B
36 MellowHH
37 SoulR&B
38 Chillout
39 EuTrance
40 Ibiza
41 DreamDnc
42 NewHipHp
43 Pop R&B
44 TrancPop
45 ChartPop
46 HouseMsk
47 Swing H
48 TcnPolis
49 Clubdanc
50 Club Ltn
51 Garage 1
52 Garage 2
53 TcnParty
54 UK Pop
55 HHGroove
56 Hip Shfl
57 HipHopPp
DISCO
58 ModDisco
59 70sDsc 1
60 70sDsc 2
61 LatinDsc
62 DscPhily
63 SatNight
64 DscChoco
65 DscHands
SWING&JAZZ
66 BB Fast
67 BBMedium
68 BBBallad
69 BB Shfl
70 AcidJazz
71 JazzClub
72 Swing 1
73 Swing 2
74 OrchSwng
75 FiveFour
76 Jazz Bld
77 Dixie
78 Ragtime
79 AfroCubn
80 Charlstn
R&B
81 Soul
82 DetPop 1
83 60s R&R
84 6/8 Soul
85 ModrnR&B
86 CroTwist
87 Rck&Roll
88 DetPop 2
89 Boogie 1
90 Boogie 2
91 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
92 Cntry8Bt
93 CntryPop
94 CntrySwg
95 CntryBld
96 Cntry2/4
97 CowboyBg
98 CntryShf
99 Blgrass
LATIN
100 BrzSamba
101 Bossa
102 PopBossa
103 Tijuana
104 DscLatin
105 Mambo
106 Salsa
107 Beguine
108 GtrRumba
109 Flamenco
110 RmbIslnd
111 Reggae
Style No. Style Name
BALLROOM
112 VienWltz
113 EngWaltz
114 Slowfox
115 Foxtrot
116 Quickstp
117 Tango
118 Pasodobl
119 Samba
120 ChaCha
121 Rumba
122 Jive
TRAD & WORLD
123 USMarch
124 6/8March
125 GerMarch
126 PolkaPop
127 OberPlka
128 Trntella
129 Showtune
130 Xmas Swg
131 XmasWltz
132 Reel
133 Hawaiian
134 Indi Pop
135 Bhangra
136 Garba
137 Goa Pop
138 Bhajan
WALTZ
139 ItalyWlz
140 MriacWlz
141 Serenade
142 SwingWlz
143 Jz Wlz 1
144 Jz Wlz 2
145 CntryWlz
146 OberWltz
147 Musette
CHILDREN
148 Learn2/4
149 Learn4/4
150 Learn6/8
151 Fun 3/4
152 Fun 4/4
PIANIST
153 Stride
154 PnoBls 1
155 PnoBls 2
156 Pno Rag
157 Pno R&R
158 PnoBoogi
159 PnoJzWlz
160 PnoJzBld
161 Arpeggio
162 Musical
163 SlowRock
164 8Pno Bld
165 PnoSwing
Style No. Style Name
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 113
Arpeggio List
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
1 UpOct
2 DownOct
3 UpDnOct
4 SynArp1
5 SynArp2
6 SynArp3
7 SynArp4
8 SyncEcho
9 PulsLine
10 StepLine
11 Random
12 Down&Up
13 SuperArp
14 AcidLine
15 TekEcho
16 VelGruv
17 Trance1
18 Trance2
19 SynChrd1
20 SynChrd2
21 Hybrid1
22 Hybrid2
23 Hybrid3
24 Hybrid4
25 PfArp1
26 PfArp2
27 PfArp3
28 PnClub1
29 PnClub2
30 PfBallad
31 PfChd8th
32 EPArp
33 PfShfl
34 PfRock
35 Clavi1
36 Clavi2
37 ChordUp
38 ChdDance
39 Salsa1
40 Salsa2
41 Reggae1
42 Reggae2
43 Reggae3
44 6/8R&B
45 Gospel
46 BlldEP
47 Strum1
48 Strum2
49 Pickin
50 GuitChd1
51 GuitChd2
52 GuitChd3
53 GuitArp
54 FngrPck1
55 FngrPck2
56 CleanGt
57 Slowfl
58 Samba1
59 Samba2
60 Harp1
61 Harp2
62 FngrBass
63 CooFunk
64 SlapBass
65 AcidBas1
66 AcidBas2
67 FunkyBs
68 ComboJaz
69 TranceBs
70 LatinBs
71 PercArp
72 Strings1
73 Strings2
74 Strings3
75 StrngDwn
76 StrngUp
77 Orchestr
78 Pizz1
79 Pizz2
80 Perc1
81 Perc2
82 R&B
83 Funk1
84 Funk2
85 HipHop
86 Trance
87 Dream
88 2 Step
89 Ibiza1
90 ClubHs1
91 ClubHs2
92 EuroTek
93 House
94 Ibiza2
95 Ibiza3
96 Garage
97 African
98 Tamb
99 Latin
100 Arabic
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
114 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
ALL TIME HITS
1 Jude Hey
2 New UK
3 MyLoving
4All OK
5 Buttercp
6 JustCall
7 CheepChp
8 Daddy’s
9 Dance?
10 GetBack
11 GtrWheel
12 HighTide
13 IWasBorn
14 Sailing
15 BluJeans
16 Holiday
17 Imagine
18 LoveMe
19 LetItBld
20 LdyMdona
21 YelowSub
22 Marriage
23 MovinOut
24 My Shell
25 NowNever
26 DoLoveMe
27 TcktRide
28 SeeClear
29 Masachus
30 Hard Day
31 USA Pie
32 Norway
33 YesterBd
MODERN POP
34 Watches
35 SoundMPH
36 Hold Us
37 Unfound
38 NeedSome
39 PrtTmLvr
40 MoonShdw
41 NikitSng
42 Sure of
43 Off Day
44 Tell Her
45 GirlsMne
46 NeedLove
POP CLASSICS
47 Standing
48 RainLaff
49 Sunshine
50 ForNamdo
51 ThankFor
52 ManPiano
53 CoinLane
54 LovesYou
55 Tmbourin
56 Alone
57 GldField
58 Raindrop
59 SultanSw
60 Life’sWk
61 TopWorld
62 WatchGrl
POP BALLAD
63 WnderLnd
64 CanIStop
65 EvryTime
66 IvoryAnd
67 TheWorld
68 LovWoman
69 Dolannes
70 Madigan
71 Paradise
72 Whisper
BALLAD
73 AllOdds
74 AtonalFl
75 Hero
76 Woman
77 RunToYou
78 LoveOfAl
79 CndleWnd
80 Cavatina
81 Cherish
82 ToLoveMe
83 YouKnow
84 Evrythng
85 EyesOfBl
86 Hello
87 BeThere
88 FlyAway
89 LoveYou
90 NeverLet
91 JustOnce
92 IfYouGo
93 SavingAl
94 InTheDrk
95 LovePwr
96 Vision
97 Beautifl
98 AllAlone
99 Opposite
100 BeHonest
101 SayYou
102 SayNthng
103 Stranger
104 OneDay
105 TheBayou
106 ThisSong
107 Distance
108 ThisWay
109 LoveGone
110 Inspirng
111 TrueColr
ROCK & ROLL
112 ShakenUp
113 Beethovn
114 HurryLov
115 BeCruel
116 Jumping
117 Countdwn
118 SuePeggy
119 Champion
120 Jailhous
121 BlueShoe
122 Rockin24
MDB No. MDB Name
123 Shouting
124 Rock&Rll
125 HonkyTnk
OLDIES
126 Daydream
127 Sumertme
128 Diana’s
129 Uptown
130 Apache
131 IGotIt
132 Tonight
133 MyPillow
134 NoRain
135 FInalDance
136 SlpnLion
137 Ghetto
138 LipsLcky
139 PrettyWm
140 TikiGtr
141 TurnThre
142 Sherry
DANCE & DISCO
143 Babylon
144 Goodbye
145 Catch22
146 DISCO
147 Survival
148 TheNavy
149 DontHide
150 Celebrat
151 LondonRU
152 10,2 Sun
153 ShakeYou
154 Believe
155 BoySumer
156 I’mSexy
157 StuffHot
SWING & JAZZ
158 Patrol
159 Charles
160 GiveLove
161 Rhythm
162 LOVE
163 LeroyBad
164 Caraban
165 Misbehav
166 Safari
167 Smiling
168 SoWhatIs
169 TimeGone
170 TasteHny
171 Sandman
172 Tunisian
173 TwoFoot
174 MyBaby
R&B
175 AsPlayed
176 BabyGrov
177 Highwy66
178 SweetCHI
179 JustU&Me
180 ManLoves
181 OurLove
182 Wish I
MDB No. MDB Name
Music Database List
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 115
COUNTRY
183 OnTheRd
184 Breathe
185 InMyMind
186 ContryHw
187 GreenGrs
188 EverNeed
189 Lonesone
190 Lucille
191 HomeRng
192 Tennesse
LATIN
193 Bananabt
194 DanceMng
195 DntWorry
196 Jamaica
197 FleaSpa
198 I’mPola
199 MamboJm
200 OneNote
201 PasoCani
202 SayNoMor
203 Beguine
204 Tijuana
205 Picture
ENTERTAINMENT
206 OnTheHil
207 Barnacle
208 Califrag
209 DadClock
210 DanceLd
211 DnceFire
212 BigCntry
213 Cabaret
214 OdeToJoy
215 Mi-Re-Do
216 MyPrince
217 Necesary
218 NoBuiz
219 NoisyOld
220 Sleigh
221 RockBasy
222 Magnifiq
223 Magnfcnt
224 SilentNt
225 Nabucco
226 Standing
227 SummerPl
228 Christms
229 Favorite
230 Tubbie
231 Turkish
232 12OClock
WALTZ & TRADITIONAL
233 Blk&Whte
234 CanCan
235 Charmain
236 Musicbox
237 Clementn
238 Doodah!
239 Dreamer
240 EnterRag
241 Birthday
242 MaryLamb
MDB No. MDB Name
243 Donald’s
244 MoonWlz
245 MoulinHt
246 Sunshine
247 PieceOf
248 GreenSlv
249 TakeFour
250 TexRose
251 ThePolka
252 Scarboro
253 Edelweis
254 AroundWd
255 Whatever
256 Yankee’s
WORLD
257 Hawaii
258 D’amor
259 ElCondor
260 GoodbyRm
261 ILandOn
262 ItalyBel
263 Cucarumb
264 Puntuali
265 Cielito
266 ItalySun
267 SantaLuc
268 Trumpetr
269 VanMass
PIANIST
270 ItalySun
271 BeGood
272 Birdland
273 BlueRose
274 Chaie’s
275 Highwy66
276 Leaves
277 Miload
278 Cabaret
279 Wonderfl
280 Imagine
281 LtleStar
282 MapleRag
283 Mi-Re-Do
284 NoBuiz
285 OhBlah
286 Charades
287 Sally’s
288 Nabucco
289 SunnyStr
290 MistyFln
291 LdnBridg
292 GrndClck
293 Importnc
294 Snowman
295 Favorite
296 SongForU
297 SugerSpn
298 ThisWay
299 WenSmile
300 ZipperD
MDB No. MDB Name
116 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM
The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.
File Name Song Name Composer
001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky
002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach
003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák
004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi
005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet
006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini
007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn
008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms
009Fruhl.mid Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II
010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten
011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller
012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller
013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller
014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller
015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller
016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller
017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller
018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller
019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin
020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven
021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart
022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin
023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini
024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert
025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin
026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach
027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog
028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional
029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional
030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward
031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional
032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional
033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional
034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional
035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster
036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional
037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher
038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza
039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional
040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster
041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont
042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher
043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt
044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach
045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven
046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet
047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec
048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn
049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach
050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel
051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart
052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven
053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn
054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell
055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet
056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini
057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional
058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional
059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional
060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional
061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional
062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional
063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner
064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional
065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional
066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau
067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional
068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional
069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional
070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional
ˇ
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 117
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-
gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing
songs that contain chord data.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in
time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-
ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-
ting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect
precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,
1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.
The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two
notes are held.
The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).
The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.
05 Off No effect.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
118 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA Date:10-OCT-2007
Model PSR-E413 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Function...
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 3
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127
Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x
After Key’s x x
Touch Ch’s x x
Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi
0,32 o o Bank Select
1,11,84 x *1 o
6,38 o o Data Entry
7,10 o o
Control 64 o o Sustain
71-74 o o Sound Controller
Change 91,93 o o Effect Depth
96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec
100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB
MIDI Implementation Chart
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 119
*1 Refer to #2 on page 120.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127
Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
: Tune x x
System : Clock o o
Real Time: Commands o o
Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)
:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x o(122)
:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o o
sages:Reset x x
120 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
NOTE:
1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions
as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming
data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-
ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel
voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.
MIDI Master Tuning
System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type
and Chorus Type.
2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-
mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-
mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the
Harmony effect.
3 Exclusive
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
This message automatically restores all default settings for
the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
This message allows the volume of all channels to be
changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).
The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values
for “ll” are ignored.)
<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,
mm, ll, cc, F7H
This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of
all channels.
The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.
The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-
tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Reverb Type MSB
ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details.
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Chorus Type MSB
ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details.
4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-
mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is
transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH
(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-
ognized.
5 Local ON/OFF
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.
Effect map
*When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest
to the specified value) is automatically set.
* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.
REVERB
CHORUS
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000 No Effect
001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3
002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2
003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2
004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2
005...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000...063 No Effect
064 Thru
065 Chorus (02)Chorus2
066 Celeste (01)Chorus1
067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2
068...127 No Effect
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 121
ATTENTION
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-
MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE
ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT
IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND
YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).
BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING
TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE
USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT
Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)
and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-
WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.
The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-
tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While
you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-
WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-
rights.
You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.
You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for
backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup
copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-
right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy
of the SOFTWARE.
You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-
WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads
and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.
2. RESTRICTIONS
You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or
otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method
whatsoever.
You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-
WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.
You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to
another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.
You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-
lates public policy.
You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without
permission by Yamaha Corporation.
Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained
by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which
you must observe.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-
mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-
ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public
without permission of the copyright owner.
The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be
removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission
of the copyright owner.
3. TERMINATION
This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-
WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-
sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate
automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termi-
nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-
panying written documents and all copies thereof.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA
As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible
media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-
rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days
from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire
liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media
if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days
with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-
aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your
sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”
and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-
CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,
YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN
THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-
MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO
EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-
SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-
ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall
Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action
(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-
WARE.
7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be
attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data
accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide
by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-
WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is
responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.
•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-
WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,
without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,
expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-
use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
8. GENERAL
This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese
law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-
dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-
forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and
effect.
9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-
ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or
revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a
fully authorized representative of Yamaha.
122 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT
By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which
will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.
The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors.
1. Definitions
In this License the following words and expressions have the
following meanings:
“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if
permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this
agreement.
“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One
Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius
Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK
“Product”: the Software and the Documentation.
“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki,
Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files
supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius
Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer.
“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the
Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.
2. License
2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable
license to use this Software in accordance with the
Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the
Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product
remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the
rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are
reserved.
2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the
Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make
or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part
of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form.
2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,
(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any
part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for
the purpose of error correction);
(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the
whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or
incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any
purpose; or
(3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than
temporary files created and required by your computer’s
operating system or web browser), including without
limitation screen capture files, files generated from the
Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any
purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the
Software) for private non-commercial use.
2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,
decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the
Software in whole or in part for any purpose.
2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate,
convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being
read by any copy or version of the Software or any data
transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in
whole or in part for any purpose.
2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any
right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or
any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity.
3. Copyright
3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and
in the components of the Product as between you and the
Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected
by copyright laws, national and international, and all other
applicable laws.
4. Disclaimer of Liability
4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed
hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all
warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or
implied, including without limitation any warranties that the
Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the
Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular
purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any
liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including
without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and
loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special,
indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in
connection with your installation and use of the Product.
5. Termination
5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your
destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to
terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you
of any condition of this License or of any of your
representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.
Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will
immediately delete the Software from your computer and
destroy the Documentation.
6. Miscellaneous
6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of
the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder
shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial
exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or
further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power
or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in
connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies
provided by law.
6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or
otherwise transfer the Product to any third party.
6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with
the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on
www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.
6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final
expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter
hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of
such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior
understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the
Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.
6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European
Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the
laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.
6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European
Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in
accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of
California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in
any way related or connected to this License shall be brought
and maintained only in the United States District Court for the
Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San
Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of
such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each
party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury
in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim),
whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related
or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.
(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 123
Specifications
Keyboards
61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.
Display
LCD display (backlit)
Setup
STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX
Panel Controls
VOICE CONTROL: [SPLIT], [DUAL], [HARMONY], [TOUCH]
LIVE CONTROL: [ASSIGN]
STYLE CONTROL: [ACMP ON/OFF], [INTRO/ENDING/rit.],
[MAIN/AUTO FILL], [SYNC STOP], [SYNC START], [START/
STOP]
SONG CONTROL: [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN), [ ] (A-B
REPEAT), [ ] (REW], [ ] (FF), [ ] (PAUSE), [ ]
(START/STOP)
REGIST MEMORY: [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]
SONG MEMORY: [REC], [1]-[5], [A]
LESSON: [START], [L], [R]
ARPEGGIO: [ON/OFF], [TYPE]
[DEMO/PC], [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT], [FUNCTION],
[MUSIC DATABASE], [METRONOME], [PORTABLE
GRAND], [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE],
[VOICE], Dial, CATEGORY[ ]/[ ], [0]-[9], [+]/[-], [TEMPO/
TAP]
Realtime Control
Pitch Bend Wheel
Knobs A, B
A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo
B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance
Voice
116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices
+ 20 arpeggio voices
Polyphony: 32
DUAL
SPLIT
Style
165 Preset Styles + External files
Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,
SYNC START, START/STOP,
INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL
Fingering: Multi Finger
Style Volume
Music Database
300 + External files
Education Feature
Dictionary
Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn
Registration Memory
•8 banks x 2 types
Function
VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume
OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensi-
tivity, Pitch Bend Range
MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type
HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume
ARPEGGIO: Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity
SFF Load: Style File Load
PC: PC Mode
MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,
Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out
METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature
Denominator, Metronome Volume
LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)
UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel, Sleep
Effects
Reverb: 9 types
Chorus: 4 types
Harmony: 26 types
Arpeggio: 100 types
Song
30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM
Songs (70)
Song Clear, Track Clear
Song Volume
Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,
REW, FF, START/STOP
Performance assistant technology
Recording
Song
User Song: 5 Songs
Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE
MIDI
Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock
Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out
Auxiliary jacks
PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN
Amplifier
2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers
12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2
Power Consumption
10W
Power Supply
Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Batteries:
Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries
Dimensions (W x D x H)
946 x 402 x 136 mm (37-1/4" x 15-13/16" x 5-3/8")
Weight
7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries)
Supplied Accessories
Music Rest
Accessory CD-ROM
Owner’s Manual
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are
for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the
right to change or modify products or specifications at any
time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or
options may not be the same in every locale, please check
with your Yamaha dealer.
f
r
Optional Accessories
AC Power Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent
recommended by Yamaha
Footswitch: FC4/FC5
Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L
Headphones: HPE-150
124 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Index
+, - .................................................. 13, 58
....................................................... 57
(REPEAT & LEARN) ............ 12, 48
(A-B REPEAT) ................... 12, 78
(REW) ..................................... 12, 40
(FF) ......................................... 12, 40
(PAUSE) .................................... 12, 40
(START/STOP) ..................... 12, 58
0–9 .................................................. 13, 58
ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34
ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14
ARPEGGIO TYPE ......................... 12, 15
ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 13, 58
DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13
DEMO/PC ...................................... 12, 40
Dial ................................................. 13, 58
DUAL ............................................. 13, 29
EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50
FUNCTION .................................... 12, 83
HARMONY ................................... 13, 60
INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 12, 71
KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18
LESSON L, R ................................. 12, 44
LESSON START ........................... 12, 44
MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 12, 71
MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24
MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80
METRONOME .............................. 12, 63
MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 13, 49
PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT .... 12, 23
PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13
PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66
PORTABLE GRAND .................... 13, 31
REC, 1–5, A ................................... 12, 52
REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80
SONG ............................................. 13, 39
SONG MEMORY .......................... 12, 52
SPLIT ............................................. 13, 30
STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12
STYLE ........................................... 13, 33
SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13
SYNC START ............................... 12, 70
SYNC STOP .................................. 12, 71
TEMPO/TAP .................................. 12, 27
TOUCH .......................................... 13, 65
USB ................................................ 13, 87
VOICE ............................................ 13, 28
A
A-B Repeat ...........................................78
Accessories .............................................7
ACMP ...................................................34
Arpeggio ...............................................14
Arpeggio List ......................................113
Arpeggio Type ......................................15
Arpeggio Velocity ................................67
Attack ....................................................20
Auto Accompaniment Range ................34
Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34
AWM ......................................................6
B
Backup ..................................................56
C
CD-ROM ..............................................93
Channel Message ..................................87
Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76
Chord Dictionary ..................................77
CHORD ROOT ....................................77
CHORD TYPE .....................................77
Chorus .............................................19, 62
Chorus Type .................................62, 117
Computer ..............................................87
Cutoff ....................................................19
D
Default Setting ......................................83
Delete (Song Track) ..............................55
Delete (User Song) ...............................55
Demo ....................................................40
Demo Cancel ........................................85
Display ..................................................59
Drum Kit ...............................................32
Drum Kit List ......................................110
Dual Voice ............................................29
Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................84
Dual Voice Octave ................................84
Dual Voice Pan .....................................84
Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................84
Dual Voice Volume ..............................84
E
Easy Chords ..........................................38
Easy Song Arranger ..............................50
Effect Map ..........................................120
Effect Type List ..................................117
External Song .......................................42
F
Filter ......................................................19
Filter (Style) ..........................................20
Flash Memory ...................................... 42
Foot Switch .......................................... 11
Function .......................................... 83-84
G
Grade .................................................... 45
H
Harmony ............................................... 60
Harmony Type ..................................... 60
Harmony Volume ................................. 69
Headphones .......................................... 11
I
Initial Send ..................................... 85, 90
Initialization ......................................... 56
K
Keyboard Out ....................................... 88
L
Lesson .................................................. 43
Load SFF .............................................. 74
Local ..................................................... 88
L-Part ................................................... 92
M
Main Voice ........................................... 28
Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 84
Main Voice Octave .............................. 84
Main Voice Pan .................................... 84
Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 84
Main Voice Volume ............................. 84
Master EQ Type ................................... 69
Measure ................................................ 59
Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79
Metronome ........................................... 63
MIDI ..................................................... 86
MIDI Data Format ............................. 120
MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 118
Music Database .................................... 49
Music Database List ........................... 114
Music Rest .............................................. 7
Mute ..................................................... 79
N
Notation ................................................ 59
O
One Touch Setting ............................... 68
f
r
Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order
Index
PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 125
P
PC Mode ............................................... 89
Performance assistant technology ........ 23
Pitch Bend Range ................................. 84
Power Adaptor ..................................... 10
Preset Song ................................39, 41-42
R
Recording ............................................. 52
Registration Memory ........................... 80
Release ................................................. 20
Remote control ..................................... 89
Repeat ................................................... 48
Resonance ............................................ 19
Reverb ............................................ 19, 61
Reverb Type ....................................... 117
R-Part ................................................... 92
S
Save (Backup File) ............................... 92
Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80
Score ............................................100-105
Sleep ..................................................... 82
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 90
Software Licensing Agreement .......... 121
Song ...................................................... 39
Song Clear ............................................ 55
Song List ...................................... 41, 116
Song Memory ....................................... 52
Song Out ............................................... 88
Song Volume ........................................ 78
Specifications ..................................... 123
Split Point ....................................... 30, 72
Split Voice ............................................ 30
Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 84
Split Voice Octave ............................... 84
Split Voice Pan ..................................... 84
Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 84
Split Voice Volume .............................. 84
Standard Chords ................................... 38
Style ...........................................33-37, 70
Style File .............................................. 74
Style List ............................................ 112
Style Out ............................................... 88
Style Tempo ......................................... 20
Style Volume ........................................ 72
Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11
Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70
Synchro Stop ........................................ 71
System Message ................................... 87
T
Tempo .................................................. 27
Time Denominator ............................... 64
Time Numerator ................................... 64
Time Signature ..................................... 63
Touch Response ....................................65
Touch Sensitivity ..................................65
Track ............................................... 52-55
Track Clear ...........................................55
Transfer ........................................... 90-92
Transpose ..............................................66
Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............98
Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99
Tuning ...................................................66
U
USB ......................................................87
USB-MIDI Driver ........................... 96-97
User Song .............................................52
V
Voice .....................................................28
Voice List ...........................................106
X
XGlite .....................................................6
126 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual
Limited Warranty
90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed
below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models
included in the following series of products:
PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARD
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect
in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject
to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the
consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as
warranty replacements.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for
assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation
of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts
under warranty.
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has
a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and
to follow all safety precautions.
EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to
failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,
and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.
Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________
Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________
(Retailer)
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Electronic Service Division
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia
Tel: 495 626 0660
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16
th
floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P. O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
EKB45
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2007 Yamaha Corporation
WM17300 XXXPOXXX.X-02B1
Printed in China
Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page
http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Purchase Date Serial No. Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E413 • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. (FCC DoC) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (battery) (standby) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. (4)-12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. 4 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 80.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to an external device such as a computer (pages 92). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-12 2/2 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Composition Title: Against All Odds Composer’s Name: Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name: EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a real musical instrument! STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-E413 Digital Keyboard! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The PSR-E413 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Owner’s Manual • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the PSR-E413 ■ Creating New Sounds Page 18 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! ■ Arpeggio Function Page 14 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 23 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 33 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. 8 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual PopBossa 102 Contents Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6 Logos ..................................................................................... 6 Included Accessories ............................................................. 7 Special Features of the PSR-E413 ........................................ 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements ........................................................... 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11 Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Front Panel .......................................................................... 12 Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13 Quick Guide Creating Arpeggios 14 Create Original Sounds 18 Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18 Using the Knobs................................................................... 21 The Easy Way to Play Piano 23 Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23 Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT .......................................................................... 30 Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31 Fun Sounds 32 Drum Kits ............................................................................. 32 Sound Effects....................................................................... 32 Playing Styles 33 Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33 Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38 Using Songs 39 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40 Types of Songs .................................................................... 42 Select a Song For a Lesson 43 Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46 Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48 Play Using the Music Database 49 Change a Song’s Style 50 Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50 Record Your Own Performance 52 Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song............................................................ 55 Backup and Initialization 56 Backup ................................................................................. 56 Initialization .......................................................................... 56 Basic Operation and Displays 57 Basic Operation ................................................................... 57 Display Items ....................................................................... 59 Reference Adding Effects 60 Harmony............................................................................... 60 Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61 Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62 Handy Performance Features 63 The Metronome.................................................................... 63 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat .......................................... 64 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ........................................ 64 Tap Start .............................................................................. 65 Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65 Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66 Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 68 Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................ 69 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................. 69 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70 Pattern Variation (Sections) ................................................. 70 Adjusting the Style Volume .................................................. 72 Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ................................................... 73 Loading Style Files............................................................... 74 Chord Basics........................................................................ 75 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77 Song Settings 78 Song Volume........................................................................ 78 A-B Repeat........................................................................... 78 Muting Independent Song Parts........................................... 79 Change the Melody Voice .................................................... 79 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80 Saving to the Registration Memory ...................................... 80 Recalling a Registration Memory ......................................... 81 Setting the Sleep Mode 82 The Functions 83 Selecting and Setting Functions........................................... 83 Connecting to a Computer 86 What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 86 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 87 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer..... 88 Remote Control of MIDI Devices.......................................... 89 Initial Send ........................................................................... 90 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 90 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 93 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ................................. 93 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 94 System Requirements.......................................................... 95 Software Installation............................................................. 95 Appendix Troubleshooting................................................................. 99 Scores ............................................................................... 100 Voice List ......................................................................... 106 Drum Kit List .................................................................... 110 Style List ........................................................................... 112 Arpeggio List.................................................................... 113 Music Database List ........................................................ 114 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 116 Effect Type List ................................................................ 117 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 118 MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 120 Specifications................................................................... 123 Index.................................................................................. 124 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor  Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument.  Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.  Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed.   AC power adaptor AC outlet ■ Using Batteries CAUTION • Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.  Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time.  Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage.  Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. 10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) The PSR-E413 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 87). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the instrument. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 95. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. NOTE • Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. Turning the Power On Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in data loss. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List Style Category List (page 41) (page 112) r e i t y u o Display (page 59) GrandPno !0 001 001 !1 !3 q w !2 !4 @6 @5 Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11 w LIVE CONTROL [ASSIGN] button .............................. page 18 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21 e [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 57 r [DEMO/PC] button ........................... page 40 t [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button ............................................... page 23 y [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ............................................... page 50 u [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 83 i LESSON [L], [R] buttons................................. page 44 [START] button ................................ page 44 o [METRONOME] button .................... page 63 !0 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27 !1 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52 12 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual !2 ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button.............................. page 14 [TYPE] button .................................. page 15 !3 SONG CONTROL [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button ... page 48 [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button ......... page 78 [ ] (REW) button .......................... page 40 [ ] (FF) button .............................. page 40 [ ] (PAUSE) button.......................... page 40 [ ] (START/STOP) button....pages 40, 58 !4 STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button .................. page 34 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............ page 71 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button............... page 71 [SYNC STOP] button....................... page 71 [SYNC START] button..................... page 70 [START/STOP] button ..............pages 33, 58 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 114) !5 !6 @2 Voice Category List (page 106) !7 !8 @1 !9 @0 @3 @4 Rear Panel @7 r f !5 Dial............................................ pages 58, 83 !6 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons ..................................... pages 58, 83 !7 [SONG] button ................................. page 39 !8 [STYLE] button ................................ page 33 !9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49 @0 [VOICE] button................................. page 28 @1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons.................... pages 58, 83 @2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31 @3 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons .. page 80 @4 VOICE CONTROL [SPLIT] button ................................. page 30 [DUAL] button .................................. page 29 [HARMONY] button ......................... page 60 [TOUCH] button ............................... page 65 @8 @9 #0 @5 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66 @6 Drum Kit........................................... page 32 The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. Rear Panel @7 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 87 @8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11 @9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11 #0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 13 e d ck Gui ui Q Creating Arpeggios Quick Guide The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggiotype phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. The indicator lights when the Arpeggio function is on. ● Voices and the Arpeggio Function This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 148 the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automatically be turned off when you select any other voice. If you want to use voices 129–148 for normal performance without the arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function off after selecting the voice. ● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on. Voice No. 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 14 Voice Name Concerto Pizzicato Piano Ballad Synth Sequence Guitarist Pauls Bass Trance Bass SynthChords Acid Bass Funky Clavi PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Voice Name ReggaeOrgan Harpeggio SalsaPIano AnalogSequence Sawtooth Piano Arpeggio Guitar Arpeggio ClubBeat R&B Loop ClubAdds NOTE • See “Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices” on page 28. Creating Arpeggios 2 Select an arpeggio type. The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. ARP Type DownOct 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Press the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] button and the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided on page 113. 3 Play the keyboard. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also record your performance (page 52). NOTE • Make sure that you are not pressing any of the keyboard’s keys while turning the arpeggio function on or off. The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the same time as the harmony function. 4 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] button to turn it off. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 15 Creating Arpeggios Create a Pop Tune You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds. 1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28). For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a single button press. 2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1 and 2 on the preceding page). For this example select “02 DownOct”. That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function. 3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function. A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern. Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “002 8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style. 8BtModrn 002 NOTE • Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33. 16 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 002 The ACMP ON icon will appear. When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only for specifying accompaniment chords. NOTE • Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm accompaniment will start. 6 Begin playing. C Am F G7sus4 Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together. The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord. Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes. If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes! Split point Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the split point. (page 30) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 17 e d ck Gui ui Q Create Original Sounds The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few tips for their use. Assigning Effects to the Knobs Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z → x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display. GrandPno 001 Number/Effect 001 Knob A Knob B z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level c EG Attack Time Release Time v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above. It is not possible to assign different effect combinations. z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not be affected. v–b affect styles only. 18 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds z Filter Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. * Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Resonance Frequency x Effect Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth of the chorus effect. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 19 Create Original Sounds c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to most ideally match the music. Attack Time Release Time Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Level Sustain Level ATTACK DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the preceding page. b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo. 20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds Using the Knobs 1 Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard. SquareLd 097 The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice. For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display). SquareLd 097 “z” appears here. Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob B can be used to adjust the resonance. 3 Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the right). Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 21 Create Original Sounds 4 Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the left hand. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registration Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve created (page 52). The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first operated after the new effect has been selected. ● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect Try This z FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 106). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. x EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. c EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. v STYLE FILTER Select style 39, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo. 22 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the function on or off. 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”. Song name AveMaria 010 Song number The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a “Song”? Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with a range of other functions (page 39). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 23 The Easy Way to Play Piano 3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button. Adjusts volume. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the fifth measure. 4 Play on the keyboard. Before After Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [ STOP) button. 24 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ] (START/ The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102. Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a style with auto accompaniment on. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 25 The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 The procedure is that same as that described for playing Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”. Nocturne 011 2 Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part. 3 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104. 26 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Change the Song Tempo When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Tempo 090 Current tempo value You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. ● About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 27 e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name GrandPno 001 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 58) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “092 Flute” voice. r 2 Flute 092 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. 28 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Select 092 Flute Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL] button. The [DUAL] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. NOTE • The dual voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Dual voice icon Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a second. D.Voice Hold for longer than a second Marimba 110 3 NOTE • You can also select the Dual Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “D.Voice” item. f “D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected dual voice Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice. Vibes 109 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT] button. The [SPLIT] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. NOTE • The split voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Split voice icon Press and hold the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second. S.Voice Hold for longer than a second FngrBass 042 30 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can also select the Split Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “S.Voice” item. f “S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected SPLIT voice Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice. Folk Gtr 033 4 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 31 Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “117 Std.Kit1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 117 to 128), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 110. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 127 and 128). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 28) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “128 SFX Kit2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, laughter, and many other useful effects. “127 SFX Kit1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 110. 32 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 165 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 112 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name BritRock 001 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Style Number 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 112. PopBossa 102 3 NOTE • An external style file loaded into style number 166 can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles. The style file must be loaded into style number 166 after transferring it to the instrument from a computer. For details, refer to the section “Loading Style Files” on page 74. Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 141, 153–165 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 34, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. PopBossa 102 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 72. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PopBossa 102 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 34 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 039 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 36 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 158 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 101 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 (b5) C7 (#11) (9) C M7 C sus4 Cm Cm C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C sus2 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 38 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. 012 The song displayed here can be played PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 39 Using Songs 3 001–030 Built in Songs (see next page) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 90–92) Listen to the song. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (START/ STOP) button again. Song start! ● Using the [DEMO/PC] button Press the [DEMO/PC] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001). You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the [DEMO/PC] button. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO/PC] button. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [ (FF), rewind [ ] (REW) and pause [ ] (PAUSE) playback of the song. ] NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. 40 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Using Songs ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo No. 1 Elements 2 CHORD Jessica 3 CHORD Chillin 4 CHORD Grand Piano Demo 5 CHORD Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo 6 CHORD Cool! Rotor Organ Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name CHORD Suggested Uses The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the performance assistant technology feature. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. The Last Rose of Summer 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Die Lorelei 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, 20, and 30 are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 41 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-E413. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 91 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic PSR-E413 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files—from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance External song file Record Transfer (page 52) (page 91) External song files can be saved to flash memory (036–). PSR-E413 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) Flash Memory (036–) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Stored in the internal flash memory. Save to internal flash memory. Currently available. Play 42 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 90–92) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson start! NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. ForElise 012 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 43 Select a Song For a Lesson 2 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the display. Right Right-hand lesson Left Left-hand lesson BothHand Both-hands lesson Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The currently selected mode is shown in the display. Waiting (Lesson 1) r1 YourTemp (Lesson 2) r2 MinusOne (Lesson 3) r3 ForElise (Song Lesson off) 012 Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. 44 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Start the lesson! Select a Song For a Lesson Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Waiting r1 Left-hand part In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. 007 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. ] Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done Excellent Very Good Good OK ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 85). PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 45 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... YourTemp r2 In this case “r2” indicate that righthand lesson 2 has been selected. Start the lesson! Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 46 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ] Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... MinusOne r3 In this case “r3” indicate that righthand lesson 3 has been selected. Start the lesson! Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play the note shown in the display. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [ (START/STOP) button. ] PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 47 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Press immediately Oops! A mistake! 48 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Jude Hey 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 114 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 90. Patrol 158 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 49 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The indicator lights when the Easy Song Arranger function is on. You can use the [SONG] and [STYLE] buttons to select a song or style, respectively, while the Easy Song Arranger function is on. 2 50 Select a Song. Press the [SONG] button, then select the song you want to arrange. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Song start! 4 Select a style. 5 Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Press the [STYLE] button and then rotate the dial to hear how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing. Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice. NOTE • When playing song numbers 010, 011 and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. GrandPno 001 6 The currently selected voice number and name are displayed here. Change the song’s melody voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected in step 5 becomes the song’s melody voice. SONG MEL Hold for longer than a second 7 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button to turn the function off. The indicator will go out. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 51 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. ● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part. Melody NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the style track. Chords Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track A ■ Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 79). Recording Procedure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 031 52 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. Record Your Own Performance 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. CAUTION • If you record to a track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. User 1 • If you use a split voice for recording, notes played to the left of the split point will not be recorded. 001 rEC Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. User 1 001 rEC To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. NOTE You can also start recording by pressing the [ ] (START/STOP) button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 55) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. User 1 rEC 003 Recording starts Current measure 4 Stop recording by pressing the [ [REC] button. ] (START/STOP) or or PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 53 Record Your Own Performance If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback. ● Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 54 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second Press and hold 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. YES A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 55 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style 166 • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Sleep Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file 166—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. 56 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall PSR-E413 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function. Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 1 Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 57 Basic Operation and Displays 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. ForElise 012 This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice and style. It also displays the name and current setting/ value of other functions. f ● CATEGORY [ Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f Decrease r ● Dial r ■ Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Example: VOICE SELECT SweetFlt Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. 090 The first voice in the selected category is selected. ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) 3 Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. r In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). 58 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (see page 27) 001 Chord Display NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (see page 65) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (see page 60) Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Song Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see page 52, 79) GrandPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (see page 29) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (see page 30) ARPEGGIO Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (see page 27) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (see page 14) Knob Assign Display Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (see page 23) This display allows you to visually confirm parameters assigned to the knobs. (see page 18) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (see page 34) SYNC STOP Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (see page 71) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 59 Reference e erenc ef R Adding Effects Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). HarmType Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 The currently selected harmony type ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34). • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 60 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 69). Adding Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. StyleVol 100 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Hall3 r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. “Reverb” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 03 Selected reverb type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available reverb types. ● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 84). Reverb Hall2 02 The currently selected reverb type PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 61 Adding Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus2 2 Selected chorus type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 117 for information about the available chorus types. Chorus Chorus1 1 The currently selected chorus type 62 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 84). e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. ■Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo GrandPno 001 090 1 Current Tempo setting 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 1 280. Indicates the beat number in the measure PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Performance Features Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. f ton for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. r 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME] but- Hold for longer than a second. TimesigN 04 Number of beats per measure. TimesigD 04 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 64 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/ song will begin playing at the tapped tempo. Touch Response Sensitivity When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [TOUCH] button to turn touch response on. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on (page 59). 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. GrandPno 001 NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Touch response icon 2 Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Hold for longer than a second. Medium 2 Touch Sensitivity PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 65 Handy Performance Features Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpos 00 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 66 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Tuning 000 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Handy Performance Features Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will appear. ARP Velo Original 1 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 67 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 28). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. SweetSpr 000 Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 39). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [ ] (START/STOP) button to start playback again. 68 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE] button after changing songs to see the name of the voice being used. Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Harmony Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the harmony volume between 000 and 127. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Harmony Volume item. HarmVol 080 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. MasterEQ Speakerl 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will appear. 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 69 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The PSR-E413 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. 70 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. MAIN A ENDING The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 38. Split point Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 71 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 through 127. longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice Hold for longer than a second SplitPnt • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 83). f 054 NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. Split point 72 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 38). Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. PopBossa 102 Appears when auto accompaniment is on Accompaniment range PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 73 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files This instrument features 165 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 166 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 90 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 166. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Execute the load operation. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 74 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Minor chord Cm Major chord CM Minor 3rd Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-E413.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C (9) C(9) C6 (9) (9) CM7 (9) * (#11) CM7(#11) * C M7 C M7 (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C Cm (9) (9) C m7 (11) Cm7(9) 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 (9) (b5) C m7 (b5) CmM7(9) * Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 C mM7 C dim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 C dim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 (b9) Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 Cdim C7(b9) (b13) C7(b13) (9) C7(9) (#11) C7(#11) (13) C7(13) (#9) C7(#9) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 C* * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. 76 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Dict. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. Dict. 001 NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 77 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. SongVol 100 Song volume A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 39) and press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback of the song. 78 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 Select the song and play it. 2 Rotate the dial to select the voice you 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings 050 Hold for longer than a second SONG MEL PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Writing! Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. 80 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type • Arpeggio settings Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. REGIST 1 1 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 81 e erenc ef R Setting the Sleep Mode This instrument has a Sleep Mode function that allows it to automatically go into a lowpower “sleep” mode if not operated for specified period of time. In Sleep Mode all panel indicators and the display backlight are off to conserve power. The Sleep Mode function is initially disabled (OFF) by default. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Sleep oFF Time to Sleep Mode 82 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the SLEEP item. 3 Rotate the dial to set the desired time until Sleep Mode begins (3–20 minutes). The time can be set in one-minute increments. Select OFF to disable Sleep Mode (the instrument will not go to sleep). The instrument will wake from Sleep Mode as soon as a panel control is operated, a key is pressed, or a MIDI command is received. No sound will be produced for approximately two seconds after waking from sleep. e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 84. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 3 Select a function. r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Transpos • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. 00 The selected function. Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 56 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 56. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 83 The Functions ● Function Setting List Setting Style Volume Item title StyleVol Range/Settings Description 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”— in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Voice Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time. Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time. Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency. Main Voice Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance. Dual Voice D.Voice 001–509 Selects the Dual voice. Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Voice Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time. Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time. Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency. Dual Voice Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance. Split Voice S.Voice 001–509 Selects the Split voice. Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Voice Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 84 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual The Functions Setting Item title Reverb Type Reverb Chorus Type Master EQ Type Range/Settings Description 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 117) Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 117) MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 117) Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–100 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14) ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 89). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 88) External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 88) Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/PC] button is pressed. Sleep Sleep 3–20, OFF Sets the amount of time before the instrument will go into Sleep Mode. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 85 e erenc ef R Connecting to a Computer Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers, sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide standard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Naturally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as well as the songs, styles and panel settings. The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions provided by this instrument. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”, “when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. ● Digital instrument note production L Tone Generator Sampling (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note Note R Playing the keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? 86 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Your keyboard performance and all panel operations of this instrument are processed as MIDI data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and User songs are also made up of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and it allows different musical instruments and devices to instantly communicate with each other, via digital data. The MIDI standard is used all over the world and was designed to transmit performance data between electronic musical instruments (or computers). Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument from another and transmit performance data between the devices-taking your creative and performance potential to even higher levels. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Connecting to a Computer ● Channel Messages This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up to sixteen different instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc. Note ON/OFF Performance data of the keyboard (contains note number and velocity data) Realtime Messages Start/stop operation Program Change Instrument selection (including bank select MSB/LSB, if necessary) Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.) Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 88). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 90). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 93. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see page 91. ■ Precautions when using the USB terminal When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. PSR-E413 USB cable PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal PSR-E413 USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Item Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this may be the most likely cause. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. f CAUTION CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. 88 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* Local OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press and hold the [DEMO/PC] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. PC mode oFF 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. r f NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 83). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 89 Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 93 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 373 KB 256 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 Style: (.sty) Music Database: (.mfd) Backup File: 08PK61.bup 90 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 91. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. Connecting to a Computer ● Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 92. q Click the CD-ROM drive Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 95). 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the w Double-click “SampleData” Folder → “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. e Click “Open” At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 91 Connecting to a Computer 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [ ] (START/ STOP) button to start playback. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “08PK61.bup” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. CAUTION CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. 92 ■Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 95 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hearing damage or damage to the playback device. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents e r Folder Name q w Application / Data Name Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_ Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs. You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook. DMN_FlashDemo Digital Music Notebook Flash Demo Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 100. q MSD_ w e SongBook USBdrv2k_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) USBdrvVista_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows Vista/XP x64) r SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 music database files This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 121 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 95 for installation and setup instructions. 94 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 87. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 97. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 98 when you have trouble with installing the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data Musicsoft Downloader OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) * Only 32-bit is supported. USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 3 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows Vista/XP x64 Windows Vista/XP Professional x64 Edition 800 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium® /Celeron® Processor family or Intel® 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more at least 3 MB of free space — 400 MHz or higher processor clock speed (Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family, or compatible processor recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 1 GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4 GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook Windows XP Home/ Professional Edition, Service Pack 1a (SP1a) more/Windows Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. at least 150 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 96. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 96. • Windows Vista installation ➔ page 97 Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 95 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows 2000 Installing the driver on Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 2 3 4 5 6 trator” account to log on to Windows 2000. Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 8 When the installation is complete, the 9 Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 7 trator” account to log on to Windows XP. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 96 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer. 10 When using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the Support Module must be installed. After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP or Vista. • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows XP or Vista. NOTE • Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary, even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver. Installing the driver in Windows Vista 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 trator” account to log on to Windows Vista. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the “Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.). NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 4 If a message allowing Windows to search 5 online for driver software appears, click “Don’t search online.” If a message prompting you to insert the disk that came with your device appears, click [Next]. The system starts the installation. NOTE • If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install]. 6 When the installation is complete, the system displays the message “The software for this device has been successfully installed.” Click [Close]. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUSSCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following Internet URL. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 97 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 3 4 5 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. Install the driver again. • Windows 2000 users........ see page 96 • Windows XP users........... see page 96 • Windows Vista users ....... see page 97 When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 95) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? 98 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual • Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. You may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I remove the driver? [Windows 2000/XP/Vista] 1 2 3 4 5 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. Select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and launch “uninstall.exe.” file. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver. NOTE • When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from “USBdrvVista_” folder. NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 6 A message asking you to restart your computer in order to complete the uninstall procedure will appear. Driver removal will be complete when you have restarted your computer. Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 88.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. • • • • When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 88. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 84) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 72). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 141 or a style between 153 and 165 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 141 and style numbers 153–165 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12 you need to play two notes at the same time. No sound is produced for about two seconds after the instrument wakes from sleep mode. This is normal. The speakers are muted for about two seconds, until the instrument wakes fully from the sleep mode. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 99 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 100 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 101 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 102 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 103 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD You Can Even Play the Same Keys! 104 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 105 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 106 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Church Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 106 Banjo 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 113 63 80’s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead Voice List Voice No. 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 ARPEGGIO 0 112 49 Concerto 0 112 46 Pizzicato 0 112 1 Piano Ballad 0 96 82 Synth Sequence 0 117 28 Guitarist 0 112 37 Pauls Bass 0 113 39 Trance Bass 0 6 82 SynthChords 0 113 39 Acid Bass 0 112 8 Funky Clavi 0 112 18 ReggaeOrgan 0 112 47 Harpeggio 0 112 2 SalsaPIano 0 115 82 AnalogSequence 0 6 82 Sawtooth 0 112 1 Piano Arpeggio 0 112 25 Guitar Arpeggio 127 0 113 ClubBeat 127 0 1 R&B Loop 127 0 113 ClubAdds ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 Voice No. 161 162 163 164 *165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 107 Voice List Voice No. 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 *274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 108 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 40 47 Yang Chin 0 0 48 Timpani ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60’s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead Voice List Voice No. 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 0 104 Sci-Fi WORLD 0 0 105 Sitar 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 96 106 Rabab 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 98 106 Oud 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 112 Shanai PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell Voice No. 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 109 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 110 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 2 2 117 127/000/001 118 127/000/002 119 127/000/009 120 127/000/017 121 127/000/025 122 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 117 127/000/001 123 127/000/113 124 127/000/033 125 127/000/041 126 127/000/049 127 126/000/001 128 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 111 Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 112 Style Name 8BEAT BritRock 8BtModrn Cool 8Bt 60sGtPop 8BtAdria 60s8Beat BblgumPp BritPpSw 8Beat Off Beat 60s Rock HardRock RockShfl 8Bt Rock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShf 1 PopShf 2 Gtr Pop 16Bt Up KoolShfl JazzRock HH Light BALLAD PianoBld LoveSong 68Modern 68SlowRk 68OrcBld OrganBld Pop Bld 16Bld 1 16Bld 2 DANCE ClubBeat Electron FunkyHse ChartR&B MellowHH SoulR&B Chillout EuTrance Ibiza DreamDnc NewHipHp Pop R&B TrancPop ChartPop HouseMsk Swing H TcnPolis Clubdanc Club Ltn Garage 1 Garage 2 TcnParty UK Pop HHGroove Hip Shfl HipHopPp PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Style No. 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 Style Name DISCO ModDisco 70sDsc 1 70sDsc 2 LatinDsc DscPhily SatNight DscChoco DscHands SWING&JAZZ BB Fast BBMedium BBBallad BB Shfl AcidJazz JazzClub Swing 1 Swing 2 OrchSwng FiveFour Jazz Bld Dixie Ragtime AfroCubn Charlstn R&B Soul DetPop 1 60s R&R 6/8 Soul ModrnR&B CroTwist Rck&Roll DetPop 2 Boogie 1 Boogie 2 6/8Blues COUNTRY Cntry8Bt CntryPop CntrySwg CntryBld Cntry2/4 CowboyBg CntryShf Blgrass LATIN BrzSamba Bossa PopBossa Tijuana DscLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GtrRumba Flamenco RmbIslnd Reggae Style No. 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 Style Name BALLROOM VienWltz EngWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstp Tango Pasodobl Samba ChaCha Rumba Jive TRAD & WORLD USMarch 6/8March GerMarch PolkaPop OberPlka Trntella Showtune Xmas Swg XmasWltz Reel Hawaiian Indi Pop Bhangra Garba Goa Pop Bhajan WALTZ ItalyWlz MriacWlz Serenade SwingWlz Jz Wlz 1 Jz Wlz 2 CntryWlz OberWltz Musette CHILDREN Learn2/4 Learn4/4 Learn6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PnoBls 1 PnoBls 2 Pno Rag Pno R&R PnoBoogi PnoJzWlz PnoJzBld Arpeggio Musical SlowRock 8Pno Bld PnoSwing Arpeggio List Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name 1 2 UpOct DownOct 3 4 UpDnOct SynArp1 5 6 SynArp2 SynArp3 7 8 SynArp4 SyncEcho 9 10 PulsLine StepLine 11 12 Random Down&Up 13 14 SuperArp AcidLine 15 16 TekEcho VelGruv 17 18 Trance1 Trance2 19 20 21 22 23 SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Hybrid4 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PnClub1 PnClub2 PfBallad PfChd8th EPArp PfShfl PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 ChordUp ChdDance Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BlldEP Strum1 Strum2 Pickin GuitChd1 Arpeggio No. 51 Arpeggio Name GuitChd2 52 53 GuitChd3 GuitArp 54 55 FngrPck1 FngrPck2 56 57 CleanGt Slowfl 58 59 Samba1 Samba2 60 61 Harp1 Harp2 62 63 FngrBass CooFunk 64 65 SlapBass AcidBas1 66 67 AcidBas2 FunkyBs 68 69 ComboJaz TranceBs 70 71 72 73 74 LatinBs PercArp Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 StrngDwn StrngUp Orchestr Pizz1 Pizz2 Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step Ibiza1 ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage African Tamb Latin Arabic PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 113 Music Database List MDB No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 114 MDB Name ALL TIME HITS Jude Hey New UK MyLoving All OK Buttercp JustCall CheepChp Daddy’s Dance? GetBack GtrWheel HighTide IWasBorn Sailing BluJeans Holiday Imagine LoveMe LetItBld LdyMdona YelowSub Marriage MovinOut My Shell NowNever DoLoveMe TcktRide SeeClear Masachus Hard Day USA Pie Norway YesterBd MODERN POP Watches SoundMPH Hold Us Unfound NeedSome PrtTmLvr MoonShdw NikitSng Sure of Off Day Tell Her GirlsMne NeedLove POP CLASSICS Standing RainLaff Sunshine ForNamdo ThankFor ManPiano CoinLane LovesYou Tmbourin Alone GldField Raindrop SultanSw Life’sWk TopWorld PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual MDB No. 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 MDB Name WatchGrl POP BALLAD WnderLnd CanIStop EvryTime IvoryAnd TheWorld LovWoman Dolannes Madigan Paradise Whisper BALLAD AllOdds AtonalFl Hero Woman RunToYou LoveOfAl CndleWnd Cavatina Cherish ToLoveMe YouKnow Evrythng EyesOfBl Hello BeThere FlyAway LoveYou NeverLet JustOnce IfYouGo SavingAl InTheDrk LovePwr Vision Beautifl AllAlone Opposite BeHonest SayYou SayNthng Stranger OneDay TheBayou ThisSong Distance ThisWay LoveGone Inspirng TrueColr ROCK & ROLL ShakenUp Beethovn HurryLov BeCruel Jumping Countdwn SuePeggy Champion Jailhous BlueShoe Rockin24 MDB No. 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 MDB Name Shouting Rock&Rll HonkyTnk OLDIES Daydream Sumertme Diana’s Uptown Apache IGotIt Tonight MyPillow NoRain FInalDance SlpnLion Ghetto LipsLcky PrettyWm TikiGtr TurnThre Sherry DANCE & DISCO Babylon Goodbye Catch22 DISCO Survival TheNavy DontHide Celebrat LondonRU 10,2 Sun ShakeYou Believe BoySumer I’mSexy StuffHot SWING & JAZZ Patrol Charles GiveLove Rhythm LOVE LeroyBad Caraban Misbehav Safari Smiling SoWhatIs TimeGone TasteHny Sandman Tunisian TwoFoot MyBaby R&B AsPlayed BabyGrov Highwy66 SweetCHI JustU&Me ManLoves OurLove Wish I Music Database List MDB No. 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 MDB Name COUNTRY OnTheRd Breathe InMyMind ContryHw GreenGrs EverNeed Lonesone Lucille HomeRng Tennesse LATIN Bananabt DanceMng DntWorry Jamaica FleaSpa I’mPola MamboJm OneNote PasoCani SayNoMor Beguine Tijuana Picture ENTERTAINMENT OnTheHil Barnacle Califrag DadClock DanceLd DnceFire BigCntry Cabaret OdeToJoy Mi-Re-Do MyPrince Necesary NoBuiz NoisyOld Sleigh RockBasy Magnifiq Magnfcnt SilentNt Nabucco Standing SummerPl Christms Favorite Tubbie Turkish 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL Blk&Whte CanCan Charmain Musicbox Clementn Doodah! Dreamer EnterRag Birthday MaryLamb MDB No. 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 MDB Name Donald’s MoonWlz MoulinHt Sunshine PieceOf GreenSlv TakeFour TexRose ThePolka Scarboro Edelweis AroundWd Whatever Yankee’s WORLD Hawaii D’amor ElCondor GoodbyRm ILandOn ItalyBel Cucarumb Puntuali Cielito ItalySun SantaLuc Trumpetr VanMass PIANIST ItalySun BeGood Birdland BlueRose Chaie’s Highwy66 Leaves Miload Cabaret Wonderfl Imagine LtleStar MapleRag Mi-Re-Do NoBuiz OhBlah Charades Sally’s Nabucco SunnyStr MistyFln LdnBridg GrndClck Importnc Snowman Favorite SongForU SugerSpn ThisWay WenSmile ZipperD PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 115 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 116 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 117 118 Model PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71-74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key’s Ch’s After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o o o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted PSR-E413 Basic Channel Function... YAMAHA Sustain Sound Controller Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:10-OCT-2007 Version : 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 120. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset Aux x x x o o : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 119 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 120) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 004 005...127 01 02 08 16 17 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 18 (04)Room1 19 20 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 120 02 08 16 17 No Effect 064 068...127 01 No Effect PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 121 SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product. The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors. 1. Definitions In this License the following words and expressions have the following meanings: “License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement. “Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the Documentation. “Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer. “Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor. 2. License 2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved. You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, (1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error correction); (2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any purpose; or (3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the Software) for private non-commercial use. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for any purpose. You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose. The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3. Copyright 3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all other applicable laws. 4. Disclaimer of Liability 4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in connection with your installation and use of the Product. 5. Termination 5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder. Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the Documentation. 6. Miscellaneous 6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law. You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer the Product to any third party. You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time. This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof. (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof. 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 (License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007) 122 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual Specifications Keyboards Effects • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls f r • VOICE CONTROL: [SPLIT], [DUAL], [HARMONY], [TOUCH] • LIVE CONTROL: [ASSIGN] • STYLE CONTROL: [ACMP ON/OFF], [INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [MAIN/AUTO FILL], [SYNC STOP], [SYNC START], [START/ STOP] • SONG CONTROL: [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN), [ ] (A-B REPEAT), [ ] (REW], [ ] (FF), [ ] (PAUSE), [ ] (START/STOP) • REGIST MEMORY: [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] • SONG MEMORY: [REC], [1]-[5], [A] • LESSON: [START], [L], [R] • ARPEGGIO: [ON/OFF], [TYPE] • [DEMO/PC], [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT], [FUNCTION], [MUSIC DATABASE], [METRONOME], [PORTABLE GRAND], [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], [VOICE], Dial, CATEGORY[ ]/[ ], [0]-[9], [+]/[-], [TEMPO/ TAP] Realtime Control • • • • Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 100 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • Pitch Bend Wheel • Knobs A, B A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance Voice • 116 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices + 20 arpeggio voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W Power Supply • Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 946 x 402 x 136 mm (37-1/4" x 15-13/16" x 5-3/8") Weight Style • 165 Preset Styles + External files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume Music Database • 300 + External files Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150 • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • MAIN VOICE: • DUAL VOICE: • SPLIT VOICE: • • • • • • EFFECT: HARMONY: ARPEGGIO: SFF Load: PC: MIDI: Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type Harmony Type, Harmony Volume * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out • METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume • LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) • UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel, Sleep PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 123 Index Panel controls and terminals A A-B Repeat ...........................................78 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................34 Arpeggio ...............................................14 Arpeggio List ......................................113 Arpeggio Type ......................................15 Arpeggio Velocity ................................67 Attack ....................................................20 Auto Accompaniment Range ................34 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34 AWM ......................................................6 r f +, - .................................................. 13, 58 ....................................................... 57 (REPEAT & LEARN) ............ 12, 48 (A-B REPEAT) ................... 12, 78 (REW) ..................................... 12, 40 (FF) ......................................... 12, 40 (PAUSE) .................................... 12, 40 (START/STOP) ..................... 12, 58 0–9 .................................................. 13, 58 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34 ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14 ARPEGGIO TYPE ......................... 12, 15 ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 13, 58 DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13 DEMO/PC ...................................... 12, 40 Dial ................................................. 13, 58 DUAL ............................................. 13, 29 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50 FUNCTION .................................... 12, 83 HARMONY ................................... 13, 60 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 12, 71 KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18 LESSON L, R ................................. 12, 44 LESSON START ........................... 12, 44 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 12, 71 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80 METRONOME .............................. 12, 63 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 13, 49 PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT .... 12, 23 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 13, 31 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 12, 52 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80 SONG ............................................. 13, 39 SONG MEMORY .......................... 12, 52 SPLIT ............................................. 13, 30 STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12 STYLE ........................................... 13, 33 SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13 SYNC START ............................... 12, 70 SYNC STOP .................................. 12, 71 TEMPO/TAP .................................. 12, 27 TOUCH .......................................... 13, 65 USB ................................................ 13, 87 VOICE ............................................ 13, 28 Alphabetical order B Backup ..................................................56 C CD-ROM ..............................................93 Channel Message ..................................87 Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76 Chord Dictionary ..................................77 CHORD ROOT ....................................77 CHORD TYPE .....................................77 Chorus .............................................19, 62 Chorus Type .................................62, 117 Computer ..............................................87 Cutoff ....................................................19 Default Setting ......................................83 Delete (Song Track) ..............................55 Delete (User Song) ...............................55 Demo ....................................................40 Demo Cancel ........................................85 Display ..................................................59 Drum Kit ...............................................32 Drum Kit List ......................................110 Dual Voice ............................................29 Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................84 Dual Voice Octave ................................84 Dual Voice Pan .....................................84 Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................84 Dual Voice Volume ..............................84 Easy Chords ..........................................38 Easy Song Arranger ..............................50 Effect Map ..........................................120 Effect Type List ..................................117 External Song .......................................42 F Filter ......................................................19 Filter (Style) ..........................................20 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual G Grade .................................................... 45 H Harmony ............................................... 60 Harmony Type ..................................... 60 Harmony Volume ................................. 69 Headphones .......................................... 11 I Initial Send ..................................... 85, 90 Initialization ......................................... 56 K Keyboard Out ....................................... 88 L Lesson .................................................. 43 Load SFF .............................................. 74 Local ..................................................... 88 L-Part ................................................... 92 D E 124 Flash Memory ...................................... 42 Foot Switch .......................................... 11 Function .......................................... 83-84 M Main Voice ........................................... 28 Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 84 Main Voice Octave .............................. 84 Main Voice Pan .................................... 84 Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 84 Main Voice Volume ............................. 84 Master EQ Type ................................... 69 Measure ................................................ 59 Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79 Metronome ........................................... 63 MIDI ..................................................... 86 MIDI Data Format ............................. 120 MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 118 Music Database .................................... 49 Music Database List ........................... 114 Music Rest .............................................. 7 Mute ..................................................... 79 N Notation ................................................ 59 O One Touch Setting ............................... 68 Index P PC Mode ............................................... 89 Performance assistant technology ........ 23 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 84 Power Adaptor ..................................... 10 Preset Song ................................39, 41-42 R Recording ............................................. 52 Registration Memory ........................... 80 Release ................................................. 20 Remote control ..................................... 89 Repeat ................................................... 48 Resonance ............................................ 19 Reverb ............................................ 19, 61 Reverb Type ....................................... 117 R-Part ................................................... 92 Touch Response ....................................65 Touch Sensitivity ..................................65 Track ............................................... 52-55 Track Clear ...........................................55 Transfer ........................................... 90-92 Transpose ..............................................66 Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............98 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99 Tuning ...................................................66 U USB ......................................................87 USB-MIDI Driver ........................... 96-97 User Song .............................................52 V Voice .....................................................28 Voice List ...........................................106 S Save (Backup File) ............................... 92 Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80 Score ............................................100-105 Sleep ..................................................... 82 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 90 Software Licensing Agreement .......... 121 Song ...................................................... 39 Song Clear ............................................ 55 Song List ...................................... 41, 116 Song Memory ....................................... 52 Song Out ............................................... 88 Song Volume ........................................ 78 Specifications ..................................... 123 Split Point ....................................... 30, 72 Split Voice ............................................ 30 Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 84 Split Voice Octave ............................... 84 Split Voice Pan ..................................... 84 Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 84 Split Voice Volume .............................. 84 Standard Chords ................................... 38 Style ...........................................33-37, 70 Style File .............................................. 74 Style List ............................................ 112 Style Out ............................................... 88 Style Tempo ......................................... 20 Style Volume ........................................ 72 Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11 Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70 Synchro Stop ........................................ 71 System Message ................................... 87 X XGlite .....................................................6 T Tempo .................................................. 27 Time Denominator ............................... 64 Time Numerator ................................... 64 Time Signature ..................................... 63 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual 125 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARD If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date______________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 126 PSR-E413 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE FINLAND Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB45 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WM17300 XXXPOXXX.X-02B1 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128

Yamaha PSR-E413 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario